JP6740604B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and production in order to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

In the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes.

[form]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball circulating in the game area,
Passing means through which the game balls circulating in the game area can pass,
A state before filling ball unit, the first state is input sphere impossible or difficult state of the game balls into the ball entrance means, capable or easily enter the sphere of game balls into the ball entrance means State transition means for transitioning between the second state, which is a state,
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage means ,
A distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes,
A first path configured such that the allocated game balls can pass through the passing means,
A second path configured such that the allocated game balls cannot pass through the passing means,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
It is possible to distribute the reached game ball to the first route,
It is possible to distribute a game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route to the second path,
It is configured such that a game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second route can be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering means is in the second state. Is configured,
The control means is
A plurality of types of transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the ball entering means starts the transition from the first state to the second state, gaming machine, wherein the the Ru can der be set to the length.

According to the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine as an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters used for a big hit lottery. It is an explanatory view explaining a win/loss table stored in a win/loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for a through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display continuation time setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the time of end of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination. It is a flowchart which shows an electric power opening and closing process. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a time chart which shows an example of a previous visual feeling notice performed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image displayed on a symbol display device, when a notice of previous feeling is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a previous notice of feeling. It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing by which a notice of a previous feeling is generated. It is the flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing of the production corresponding to the previous notice of visual feeling. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example which makes the number of production elements of the same contents executed a plurality of times increase with progress of time. It is a time chart which shows an example of a previous visual feeling notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a previous visual feeling notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display surface when the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment is performing the previous visual feeling notice. It is a time chart which shows an example of a previous visual feeling notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 4th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline|summary of the process performed in the main control apparatus and audio|voice emission control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a previous visual feeling notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects a button effect XA as an effect element for pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XA twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production mode XA1, XA2 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XA. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XA is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XB twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production mode XB1, XB2, XB3 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XB. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XB is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XC as an effect element for pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XC twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production aspect XC1 and XC2 which are executed in button production XC, and suggestion production F. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XC is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already being seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XD twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production selection screen XD1, production aspect XD2 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XD. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XD is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XE twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production selection screen XE1, production mode XE2 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XE. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XE is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XF as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XF twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production mode XF1 and XF2 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XF. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XF is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XG as the effect element for pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XA twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production mode XG1 and XG2 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XG is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already seen. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in the case where the pachinko machine selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XH twice. It is the explanation drawing which shows the contents of production mode XH1, XH2, XH3 and suggestion production F which are executed in button production XH. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing when button production XH is performed as a production element for a notice of a feeling of already being seen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit in case the 1st high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit in case the 2nd high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for a starting mouth performed by a pachinko machine of an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion|finish of the opening/closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric power combination support performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric-role combination opening/closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the locus|trajectory of the game ball when a game ball enters the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for a starting mouth performed by a pachinko machine of a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion|finish of the opening/closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric-role combination opening/closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the other example of a structure of a 2nd starting opening unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a structure of a 2nd starting port unit concretely. In the pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment, it is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit at the time of winning the 1st type electric opening. It is a timing chart showing a timing at which a game ball reaches a through gate and an opening/closing ball entrance device, and showing a control mode of an opening/closing door when a first type electric role opening is won. In the pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment, it is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit at the time of winning the 2nd kind electric opening. It is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate and the opening/closing ball entrance device, and a control mode of the opening/closing door when the second type electric role opening is won. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion|finish of opening/closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric power combination support performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric-role opening/closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening/closing door in the 1st high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening/closing door in the 2nd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening/closing door in the 3rd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening/closing door in the low frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening/closing door when the fluctuation time of a universal figure unit is set to 0.95 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening/closing door when the fluctuation time of a universal figure unit is set to 0.25 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening/closing door when the fluctuation|variation time of a universal figure unit is set to 0.05 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation time table for high frequency support modes in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically increase/decrease of the game ball which a player has in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Gaming machine electrical configuration:
A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
A5. Notice of existing feeling:
A5-1. Summary of the notice of visual feeling:
A5-2. Control related to the visual sense notice:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth Embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Thirteenth Embodiment:
N. Modification:
O. Inventions extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When installing the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 on the outer frame 11 in a non-openable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 on the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and decorative parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination component is composed of a light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or flashing at each game time performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, etc. A glass unit 19 made of two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in the shape of a box with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and a player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball drops from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs the game effect in which the operation is reflected.

Further, an operation handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount by a change in electric resistance is provided. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main controller 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction to fire the game ball is input from the main controller 60, the firing control device 80 fires a game ball having a strength according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. Tank rail 55 having, a case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area GA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and is discharged to the upper part of the game area GA, and then flows down in the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area GA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when the game balls are won in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first starting port 33 is above the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won any of the various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out port 43.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the power combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the power-released state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down in the game area GA after winning and the second It is possible to win a prize in the starting opening 34. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 has a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The open/close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big hit is won and the open/close execution mode is entered, the open/close door 36b repeats the open state in which the game balls can win and the closed state. The opening/closing execution mode is a case where a jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 is performed, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning a prize 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second start opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning a prize opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won is performed. In the present embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning in the first starting opening 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first result display section 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the prize in the second starting opening 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display unit displays the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the second result display section 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st hold|maintenance display part 37c displays the number of hold|maintenance of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory release lottery is finished, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. For example, the display device may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round game is an open/close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games depends on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the first result display unit 37a based on the winning in the first starting opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second result display section 37b based on the winning in the second starting opening 34. .. The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening/closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As a variable display, a design in which a design such as a character is attached to each design showing the numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, which are left, middle, and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from the bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol sequence Z1, the symbol sequence Z3, and the symbol sequence Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. .. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L.

In addition, in this specification, one of the game times refers to either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the first start opening 33 or the second start opening. It refers to a period from when the variable display is started based on one of the winning prizes 34, until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the next variable display is started. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as the display continuation time. The display continuation time is the variation display time that is the time from the start of variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the change of the next game time is started after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. It is composed of a stop display time which is a time until the stop. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, and the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as numbers can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Gaming machine electrical configuration:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using block diagrams.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The MPU 62 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, the MPU 62 is provided as a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e, which are provided at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to a detection sensor and determines whether or not a game ball flowing down in the game area GA during the game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning a prize driving unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning a prize device 36, an electric auditors product driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting port 34, and a main display The part 45 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning award drive unit 36c so that the open/close door 36b is opened/closed. When the electric role opening is selected as a result of the electric role opening lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role driving unit 34b so that the electric role 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the open/close execution mode, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. Display control is executed.

The payout control device 70 and the sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of doing, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case where the winning of the second starting opening 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls. A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production that reflects the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the display duration of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence/absence of reach, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect executed at each game time, and the like are grasped.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery to determine whether or not the reach is generated when the column is displaced and the jackpot random number counter C1 is set with the random number initial value counter CINI. Further, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the display continuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

A reserved information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The reserved information storage area 64b is composed of a first result display section reserved area Ra, a second result display section reserved area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b in time series. Stored in.

The jackpot random number counter C1 will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599).

The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening. When the game ball is won in 34, it is stored in the second result display reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table in the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a win/loss table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a win/loss table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the value of the random number for jackpot winning is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the value of the random number to be the jackpot win is 21. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball wins the first start opening 33, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) and the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM64) at a timing.

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) The electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-mentioned (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency is relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of individual items is reached. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening/closing door 36b. It can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area GA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball may occur.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are set in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. If the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open/close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may not be substantially won.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, a probability variation lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed by using a win/loss table for high probability as a win/loss table, and a win/loss table. It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a win/loss table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the winning/discarding table for high probability, the jackpot lottery is won compared to the case where the jackpot drawing is performed using the winning/discarding table for low probability. There is a high probability that

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode is ended, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area GA. When the comparison is made in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric auditors' aft 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening to the start of the next opening is It may be set shorter than one opening time. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. May be.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start is higher than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he holds. You can

The configuration in which the high-frequency support mode has a higher frequency of being in the electric role open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning a winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are secured for the next electric accessory release lottery performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the display duration time of one time in the universal figure unit 38), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability, apply any one or any combination of conditions. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

As described above, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots on the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The distribution destination of the big hit type corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first result display unit, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second result display unit.

As shown in the distribution table for the first result display unit of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33 is 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R. Probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot is set. In the 8R regular jackpot and the 16R regular jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the win/loss lot mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the termination reference number (specifically 100 times) after the shift to the high frequency support mode.

In the 8R probability jackpot and the 16R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning/discarding lottery mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode for the 8R probability jackpot and the 16R probability jackpot will continue until the next jackpot win.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" correspond to the 8R regular jackpot, and "6 to 8" are the 16R regular jackpots. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game is suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display unit of FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34 is 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot. Big hit, 8R sure change big hit, 16R sure change big hit are set. In the distribution table for the second result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot, and “3 to 8” is the 16R regular jackpot. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 14" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

On the other hand, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability of being distributed to the probability variation jackpot is the same when the jackpot is won. That is, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are assigned. The total number of the jackpot type counters C2 and the number of the jackpot type counters C2 is 21 in each case. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpots, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the second starting opening 34. It will be higher than if the jackpot was won based on the prize.

As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a win will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that, if the result of the win/win lottery is a failure, the opening/closing execution mode is not entered, and the win/win lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

As described above, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot lottery, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the symbols displayed on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. To decide. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. Is compared with the reach determination table stored in (1) to determine whether or not to reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is a display state in which the symbols are displayed, and the symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit refers to a combination of the same symbols in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), first the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z2.

Also, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character etc. as a moving image on the background screen, In addition to displaying or reducing the combination of the symbols in which the reach line is formed and displaying it in a reduced size, the reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. Further, when the reach effect is being performed or before the reach display, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform the advance notice display using the predetermined image such as the predetermined character. May be.

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display duration time on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation display is started on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and when the fluctuation display of the symbol by the symbol display device 41 is started. The display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the display duration in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric reserve holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

It should be noted that one combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and 2 One combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Rb for the result display unit corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information Corresponds to the special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 to advance the game of each game time will be described. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S103.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S104.

In step S104, a winning process for the starting openings associated with winning the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning opening process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a winning process for a through game accompanying the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting mouth>
Next, the winning process for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 9: S104) of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Then, it progresses to step S203.

In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step S204.

In step S204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first result display hold area Ra is read out, and the first start hold number is read. RaN is set as a target of the process described later. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on winning in the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step S209.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 (start winning). Whether or not it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set. Then, it progresses to step S207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won in the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for the main starting port ends.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S208.

In step S208, the starting hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second starting hold number RbN), which is the value stored in the holding number storage area of the second result display holding area Rb, is read out, and the second starting hold number is read. RbN is set as a target of the process described later. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on winning in the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the number N of start-up suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is ended. On the other hand, in step S209, when the start pending number N is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and after adding 1 to the start pending number N of the corresponding result display holding area, In step S211, 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step S212.

In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas for the result display unit, that is, the step It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in S210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the first value. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the 1 result display holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first starting hold number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the second result. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the copy holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold command. Then, the winning process for the starting opening is finished. The hold command includes a voice light emission control device 90 and a display control device, which are sub-side control devices, for indicating that a winning has occurred in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and holding information acquired based on the winning. In addition to letting 100 be recognized, whether or not the pending information related to this prize corresponds to the big hit, if it corresponds to the big hit, which kind of big hit corresponds to it, whether it corresponds to the reach occurrence This is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm whether or not the holding information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. This hold command is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process described later, and the voice light emission control device 90 that receives the hold command receives the confirmation process described later (FIG. 27: According to step S1602, FIG. 29), whether or not the pending information related to the present winning corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, which kind of jackpot is supported, and the occurrence of reach is dealt with. It is confirmed whether or not the holding information is subject to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60.

Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased in the number of hold. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of held display items in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

It should be noted that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, based on the information (reserved information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by this prize winning, this prize winning. Confirmation process to confirm whether the pending information related to the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, what type of jackpot is supported, whether it corresponds to the reach occurrence, etc. The configuration may be such that the same processing as the confirmation processing in step S1602 of FIG. 27 and FIG. 29) is executed and the confirmation result is set in the hold command. In this case, the confirmation process (FIG. 27: step S1602, FIG. 29) by the voice emission control device 90 can be omitted.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9: S105).

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a winning process for a through game. In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has won the through-gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether. The bonus holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 that are held for the electric bonus opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the winning process for this through is ended.

When it determines with it being less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN in step S302 (S302:YES), it progresses to step S303 and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step S304. On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the value of the accessory reserve number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the accessory reserve number SN is not less than the upper limit value, The winning process for this through is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

In step S304, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area 64c of the RAM 64, which is the free storage area. After that, the winning process for this through is completed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device upon power-on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step S402.

In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands relating to effects such as a variation command and a type command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S404.

In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a, the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S407.

In step S407, electric power support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a should be opened. The details of the process for supporting the power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S408.

In step S408, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (strictly, the start of the external output process in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has come. When it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S408: NO), the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in steps S409 and S410. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S409, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In addition, in step S410, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, in step S408, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402 and each process from step S402 to step S407 is performed. Execute.

In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S405) of the normal process.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S501, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag is stored in the open/close execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is also ended in the game state transition process.

When it is determined in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (S501: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step S502. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and is erased when the variable display ends.

When it is determined in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to the game time start process of steps S503 to S505. In step S503, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S503: YES), the present game number control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is not "0" (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and then in step S505. move on. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S505, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Then, this game time control processing is ended. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later.

When it is determined in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S502: YES), the game-time progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed.

In step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of this game time has elapsed. As described above, the variable display time is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, and is a part of the display continuation time. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 is "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the display duration setting process (FIG. 15: S714) described below. The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the flow advances to step S507 to execute the variable display process. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode on the result display unit related to the current game time. After executing step S507, the game number control process is ended.

If it is determined in step S506 that the fluctuation display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the flow advances to step S508 to execute fluctuation ending processing. The variation end process displays the result display unit so that the mode of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (S505) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game time. Control. After executing step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect in the game time based on the received fluctuation end command. In addition, the variation end command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the variation end command to finalize and display the final stop symbol in the game time (final stop). Display). After executing step S509, the game number control process is ended.

The pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to use the variation end command. In this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game time with a timer counter or the like, and based on the lapse of a predetermined time, the game time in the game time is increased. The effect may be ended, or the final stop symbol in the game time may be fixedly displayed (final stop display).

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 13: S504).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold quantity RbN held and stored in the second result display hold area Rb is “0”. When it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending number RbN is "0" (S601: YES), the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed, while When it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not “0” (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S608 to S613 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more, as described in FIG. 13 (see FIG. 13: S503). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, hold information for variable display is stored for the second result display unit 37b. If so, the data stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is the target of this data setting process regardless of whether the first starting hold number RaN is 1 or more. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second starting opening 34 is stored. The holding information stored in the holding area Rb is prioritized.

In step S602, the first starting hold number RaN of the first result display holding area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S603, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S605.

In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, if the second result display unit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is erased, and if not stored, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target for starting the variable display this time is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step S607.

In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift time command including the information that it corresponds to is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings, based on the received shift time command. To do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

When it is determined in step S601 that the second startup hold number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit of steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. To do.

In step S608, the second start reserve quantity RbN in the second result display reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S609. In step S609, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S610 to move the data stored in the first area of the second result display section reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S611.

In step S611, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S611, the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S612, if the second result display unit flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e does not store the second result display unit flag, the flag is stored. If so, the flag is stored. Maintain state. Then, it progresses to step S613.

In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second result display holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34. The shift time command including the information that it corresponds to is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of hold based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the reduction in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game time control process (FIG. 13: S505).

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S701, it is determined whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area provided in each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is stored at the end of the opening/closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability variation jackpot, After that, it is usually erased when you win the jackpot.

When it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702, and the win/loss determination is performed by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. Determine whether. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the high-probability mode is set (S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S703 to refer to the high-probability mode win/loss table to make a win/fail determination. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win/loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine whether. After executing step S702 or step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/no win determination (big win lottery) in step S702 or step S703 is a big win. In step S704, if the result of the win/no win determination is a big hit (S704: YES), in steps S705 to S712, to set a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit and a stop result The process of is executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. When it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is not stored (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S706 and the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 8A). Refer to to determine the sorting. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range of 8R regular jackpot, a numerical range of 16R regular jackpot, a numerical range of 8R sure variation jackpot, and a numerical range of 16R sure variation jackpot. Is included in.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707 and the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 8B). Refer to) to make the sorting decision. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range of 8R regular jackpot, a numerical range of 16R regular jackpot, a numerical range of 8R sure variation jackpot, and a numerical range of 16R sure variation jackpot. Is included in. After executing the processing of step S706 or step S707. It proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is a probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step S708 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S709, a stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, in the current game times to win the probability variation jackpot, fluctuates in the state of displaying any stop result on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the big hit distributed in step S706 or step S707 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, if it is an 8R certainty variation jackpot, the 8R certainty variation flag is stored, and if it is 15R certainty variation jackpot, the 15R certainty variation flag is stored. Then, it progresses to step S714.

In step S708, when it is determined that the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is not the probability variation jackpot (S708: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process, in the current game times that will be won for the normal jackpot, fluctuate in the state of displaying any stop result on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 can be obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 (big jack type flag) is stored in the corresponding area of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, the 8R normal flag is stored when the 8R normal jackpot is stored, and the 15R normal flag is stored when the 15R normal jackpot is received. Then, it progresses to step S714.

In step S704, when the result of the big hit lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not the big hit (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and the stop result setting process for out-of-range is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement ends the variable display in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game time that is the disengagement result. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S713, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S714, display continuation time setting processing is executed. The display continuation time setting process sets the display continuation time, which is the time required for the current game in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. This is a process for doing. The details of the display duration setting process will be described later. After executing step S714, the process proceeds to step S715.

In step S715, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. When it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process proceeds to step S716 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and display duration information set in step S714. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S715: YES), the flow advances to step S717 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and display duration information set in step S714. After executing step S716 or step S717, the process proceeds to step S718.

In step S718, the type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

The variation command and the type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S718, the process proceeds to step S719.

In step S719, the variable display of symbols is started on the result display section corresponding to the current game time among the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, the variable display is started by specifying that the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is the first result display unit 37a. If the second result display unit flag is stored, the variable display is started by specifying that the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is the second result display unit 37b. After executing step S719, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Display duration setting process>
Next, the display duration setting process will be described. The display continuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S714) of the fluctuation start process.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the display duration time. In step S801, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62. Then, it progresses to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64, and if either flag is stored, it is determined that a reach occurs (S802: YES). ), and proceeds to step S803. Further, even if none of the above flags are stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, reach is generated. Then, it is determined (S802: YES), and the process proceeds to step S803. When the presence/absence of the reach is determined using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S803, the display continuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach occurrence display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process proceeds to step S804, and the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the display continuation time setting process ends.

In step S802, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d. With reference to, the display continuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S806, and the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the display continuation time setting process ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display continuation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set such that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of total pending quantity CRN increases. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the display duration may be set to be shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN is smaller. .. When the second start pending quantity RbN is “0”, the display duration becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending quantity RaN is larger, and the second start pending quantity RbN is “1” or more. In addition, the display continuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of second start pending numbers RbN is larger. When the second start pending quantity RbN is “0”, the display duration becomes longer as the number of the first start pending quantity RaN is larger, and the second start pending quantity RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the display continuation time becomes longer as the number of second start pending numbers RbN increases, or becomes constant without depending on each of the pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of hold information is the same, the reach non-reach A generation display duration table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected display durations may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when the reach occurs, and the display continuation time that is easy to be selected and the display continuation time that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is lost. It may be configured. In addition, the display duration time table for the probability variation big hit, the display duration time table for the normal big hit, the display duration time table for the out-reach, and the display duration time table for the complete loss may be individually set. As described above, the display continuation time of each game time is determined by using the presence/absence of a big hit, the presence/absence of a reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter as parameters.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 12: S406).

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing the game state transition processing. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. When it is determined in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, and the variable display of the symbols on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b of one game time It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. In step S902, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is ended (S902; NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

When it is determined in step S902 that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result of this game time (the result of the jackpot lottery) is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 8R probability variation flag, the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R normal flag, and the 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64. When it is determined that none of the above flags are stored (S903: NO), this game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step S903 that any of the above flags is stored (S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S904, and a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open/close execution mode is performed. Execute. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Check. Then, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation flag, 16R normal variation flag, 8R certainty variation flag, 8R normal variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. When it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R probability change flag or the 16R normal flag (S905: YES), the process proceeds to step S906, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty change flag or the 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. "8" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After executing step S906 or step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the opening/closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S908, the present game state transition processing ends.

When it is determined in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909, and the special winning opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or more than "1", and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. When the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning award driving unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S909, the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S910: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S910: YES), the process proceeds to step S911 and the ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S911, the process proceeds to step S912.

In step S912, a transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the current opening/closing execution mode is ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described later. After executing step S912, the process proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S914, and the ending process of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, 8R probability variation flag, 16 normal flag, and 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are erased, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing step S914, the present game state transition processing ends.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S909) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening/closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. When it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1002: YES), the main winning opening/closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1003: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable winning drive unit is opened to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step S1005.

In step S1005, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the winning modes that have been set are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ] May be set. After executing step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening/closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the start of the release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started based on the received opening command, and at the same time, the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 are changed to the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents corresponding to the start.

When it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step S1008 that no winning has occurred (S1008: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that a winning has occurred (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S1010.

In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning prize counter area PC is not "0" (S1010: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1007: YES), or if it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011 and the special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step S1012.

In step S1012, 1 is subtracted from the value in the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step S1013 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1013: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1013: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is completed, and the normal process In the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening of the special winning opening 36a ends. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.
The corresponding process is executed.

<Transition process when the open/close execution mode ends>
Next, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S912) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the shift processing at the end of the open/close execution mode. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is stored in the RAM 64 as a big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102 and the flag erasing process is executed. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for identifying the gaming state. Specifically, if the open/close execution mode flag, the high-probability mode flag, and the high-frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S1104 to store the high-frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode is completed, the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step S1105.

In step S1105, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss selection mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

When it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1106 to execute the flag erasing process. Then, it progresses to step S1107.

In step S1107, after storing the high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S1108, and "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high frequency support mode ends after 100 times of game times are executed, and thereafter, the winning/winning lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. .. After executing step S1108, the transition process at the end of the main opening/closing execution mode is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, the processing for supporting the electric power combination will be described. The electric power support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal processing subroutine (FIG. 12: S407).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and is erased when returning to the closed state. When it is determined in step S1201 that the in-support flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the electric role opening lottery that determines whether or not to open the electric role object 34a, and is deleted when the under-support flag is stored. .. When it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1203: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1204 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1204: YES), the flow advances to step S1205 to set the out-of-display, and then the main electric power support processing is ended. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is ended in the state where the deviation display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0”. When it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is "0" (S1206: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1208, and it is determined whether or not in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step S1207 (S1207: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S1208 (S1208: YES), the flow advances to step S1209 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step S1210.

In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1209 is support win. When it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S1210: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211, and the support winning flag is stored and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, it progresses to step S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

In step S1212, it is determined whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode. When it is determined in step S1212 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1212 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1212: NO), the electric power combination supporting process is ended as it is.

In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S1213 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1213: NO), the main power combination support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1213 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1214, and the high frequency support flag is erased. Then, it progresses to step S1215.

In step S1215, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process for supporting electric power is ended.

The low frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal external output process (FIG. 12: step S402). The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the processing corresponding thereto.

If it is determined in step S1207 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step S1217.

In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1216 is support win. If it is determined in step S1217 that the support has not been won (S1217: NO), the main electric power support process is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1217 that the support is won (S1217: YES), the process proceeds to step S1218, the support winning flag is stored, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2, The process for main electric power support is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1219, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1219: NO), the pattern change display in the universal figure unit 38 is being performed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

In step S1220, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1221 to store the in-support flag and delete the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

When it is determined in step S1201 that the in-support flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1222, and electric power opening/closing processing for opening/closing the electric accessory 34a is executed. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Opening/closing electric power>
Next, the power combination opening/closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1222) of the electric power combination support process.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1302: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S1305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1305: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step S1306, and the in-support flag is erased. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

When it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1307: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1307: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308, and an opening process for controlling the electric auditors product 34a to the open state is executed. .. Then, it progresses to step S1309.

In step S1309, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S1309: NO), the flow proceeds to step S1310 to determine whether the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S1310: YES), the flow advances to step S1311, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is set in step S1309 (S1309: YES), or when it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not set in step S1310 (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

A4. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, a hold confirmation table storage area 93a, a visual sense advance notice occurrence table storage area 93b, a visual sense advance notice notice effect table storage area 93c, a visual sense advance notice stop symbol table storage An area 93d, a variable display pattern table storage area 93e and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, a notice effect storage area 94d for pre-visualization notice, and the like. Details of these will be described later. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the production operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). ..

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105, which is an IC chip, is also called a "drawing chip", and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A5. Notice of existing feeling:
A5-1. Summary of the notice of visual feeling:
Next, the outline of the visual sensation notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of a notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the notice of the sense of sight is executed. The pre-visual feeling notice means that the player has a pre-existing feeling (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed plural times by causing the player to execute at least one effect element a plurality of times with the same content. It is a performance to give. The effect element is one unit that constitutes a game effect, and includes, for example, a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image (still image or moving image) to be displayed in front of the background image, and a predetermined object image such as a mini character as a background. Object notice effect that is displayed in front of the image (mini-character notice effect), background change notice effect that changes the background image to a mode different from the normal time, feature effect notice effect that causes a predetermined accessory to perform a predetermined operation, Lamp emission effect that makes the lamp emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol sequence variation effect that varies the symbol sequence in a prescribed scroll pattern, and the remaining one symbol in the state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line Examples include reach production in which the columns are changed, symbol pseudo-stop production in which a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped in a pseudo manner, symbol complete stop production in which a predetermined combination of symbols is completely stopped, and the like.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines, based on the hold information, whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual feeling has been satisfied, that is, whether to generate the notice of visual feeling. Then, when it is determined that the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 ends the game time related to the hold information for which it is determined that the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling is satisfied. , At least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, before the pending information targeted for the determination is targeted for the jackpot lottery. ..

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after confirming that the following conditions are satisfied when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and acquires the hold information. Then, the already-explained notice advance announcement lottery process, which will be described later, is executed. In the case of winning the visual sense advance notice lottery process, the condition for generating the visual sense advance notice is satisfied.
(Condition 1) The pending information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the previously stored pending information. (Condition 2) When the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, the winning prize is related to this time. The total pending quantity CRN including the pending information is 2 or more (condition 3) When the game ball wins the second starting opening 34, the second starting pending quantity RbN including the pending information relating to the current winning. Is 2 or more

The reason for condition 1 is that even if the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times by using the game times related to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot and the game times related to the hold information that has been won this time, it corresponds to the jackpot. This is because the jackpot effect is executed after the game times related to the holding information to be performed, so that the continuity of the effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of being already seen. The reason for Condition 2 and Condition 3 is that if the number of holdings including the holding information related to the present winning is 2 or more, it is possible to execute the pre-visual feeling notice over a plurality of game times. In addition, in the condition 3, the reason why the second start hold number RbN is the reference is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired by winning the second start opening 34 is the first start opening 33. This is because the jackpot lottery is prioritized over the holding information acquired by the winning of the prize. However, these conditions are mere examples, and other conditions may be imposed or may not be satisfied. For example, in the case where the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, these conditions may not be necessary.

In the visual sensation notice occurrence lottery process of the present embodiment, the visual sensation notice is given only when the pending information related to the present prize is the pending information that will be a jackpot win or reach when it is later targeted for the jackpot lottery. You can win the outbreak. The reason is that a relatively long display duration is set in the game times related to the holding information that causes a big hit or a reach occurs, and thus suggestive effects, battle effects, and the like, which will be described later, are easily executed. Then, in the case of winning the visual sensation advance notice lottery process, the condition for generating the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be on hold when it is determined that the condition for generating the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied. At least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content until the game time relating to the information ends.

In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23(A), a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 at a timing when the total reserved quantity CRN is 2 and the total reserved quantity CRN becomes 3, and based on the pending information related to the winning. As a result of performing the above determination by the above, the case where the condition for generating the notice of visual feeling is satisfied is shown. Then, the game time P03 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the reservation information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the pachinko machine 10 selects the cut-in notice production A having the same content as the production element A to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the cut-in having the same content. The notice effect A is executed once in each of the three game times P01, P02, and P03. That is, the pachinko machine 10 respectively executes the cut-in notice effect A in all the consecutive game times until the game times relating to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the notice of the visual sense are completed. There is.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 completely stops the symbol A (for example, a combination of symbols “1, 2, 3”) in the first game cycle P01 to completely stop the symbol production. In addition to executing, the symbol complete stop effect for completely stopping the same disengagement symbol A is also executed in the second game cycle P02. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects a symbol complete stop effect with the same content of completely stopping the same deviation symbol A as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and completely stops the symbol with the same content. The production is executed multiple times.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in the third game time P3, and then executes the symbol pseudo stop effect of artificially stopping the detachment symbol A. There is. Strictly speaking, the symbol pseudo stop effect is different from the symbol complete stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the aspect of the effect that the player can recognize is very similar between the case where the combination of symbols is stopped in a pseudo manner and the case where it is stopped completely. Therefore, in the present specification, the symbol pseudo stop effect is regarded as a production element having the same content as the symbol complete stop effect for completely stopping the symbol if the content of the combination of the symbols to be pseudo stopped is the same. In the following, the symbol complete stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect are collectively referred to as a symbol stop effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. .. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggestive effect is to display an image in which a female character throws a message to the player on the pattern display device 41, and causes the voice and light accompanying the image to be displayed. In this mode, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 output. However, the suggestive effect may be in any other mode as long as it can instruct the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, for example, "maybe dejabu?" , "Is it a dejabu?", "Dejabu?", "Is dejabu a sign of a jackpot?", "This production is familiar!", "Ah? I saw the same production as before...", An image including a message such as "This is a sense of sight!?", "I'm bored with the same production..." is displayed on the pattern display device 41, or a voice including these messages is output from the speaker 46. It may be an effect or the like.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, then executes the battle effect in which the player character and the enemy character are confronted, and then the result corresponding to the jackpot lottery result. Perform effects (winning effect if you win the jackpot, defeating effect if the result is off). In the example shown in FIG. 24, in the battle effect, an image in which the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side are confronted is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are displayed by the speaker 46. And various lamps 47. However, the battle effect may be in another form or may be omitted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 24, in the victory effect, an image in which the female character on the player side is pleased with the victory is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are output to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to output to. However, the winning effect as a result effect may be in another form or may be omitted. After that, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, so that the player has the sense of a dimple that the effect elements having the same content have been executed a plurality of times. Can be given. The player who has recognized the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot. Further, when the player experiences winning the jackpot after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect elements are executed in the expectation that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time I play, I always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the attention degree of the player to the effect element to be sequentially executed. It can be suitably increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, different reliability (expectation) can be set for each type of effect element that is executed in a single shot, so that, for example, effect elements with high reliability have the same content. When it is executed multiple times, the player strongly expects that there is a very high possibility of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when a production element with low reliability is executed, Also, the player comes to expect that the effect element will be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the player's attention to the effect element can be appropriately increased.

In addition, even if the effect that directly suggests that the jackpot is highly likely to be won, for example, the effect of turning on the read-ahead holding lamp or the like in a different color from the normal time is not executed, the same content is obtained. It is possible to add a game of paying attention to whether or not the effect element of is executed multiple times.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and at the same time, having the same content. It is possible to convince the player that the effect element has a special meaning that it is executed a plurality of times. Then, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player may only accidentally execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times, or an already-existing feeling with suggestive effect. Whether or not it was a notice will be confirmed depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is expected that the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute, as a production element, an operation reception production element (button production) including content that suggests acceptance of the operation of the production operation button 24 by the player. When the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling is satisfied, the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason for this will be described. When the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). There are cases where For this reason, even if the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied and the pachinko machine 10 executes the same type of button effect a plurality of times, depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, the button may be pressed. The effect may be executed with different contents, and it may not be possible to give the player a sense of being seen. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from being lost, and it is possible to surely give the player a feeling of being seen. However, the pachinko machine 10 cancels the execution of the visual sensation advance notice when the button effect is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, even when the condition for generating the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied. It may be configured.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the visual sensation notice is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and If it is determined that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, the target to be executed multiple times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. The execution of the effect element is started. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the display duration, which is the time required for each game time, immediately before starting each game time. For this reason, if the condition for generating the visual advance notice is satisfied and the type of the effect element (for example, cut-in notice effect) to be executed a plurality of times in the visual advance notice is randomly selected, within the display duration time of each game time. There is a case where an effect element having a length that cannot be executed is selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times that can be selected in each game time, when the condition for occurrence of the previous visual feeling notice is satisfied. An element is selected as an effect element to be executed multiple times, and the selected effect element is executed at each game time. By doing so, even when the display durations determined for each game time are different, the effect elements having the same content can be surely executed at each game time.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display duration of the game time, which is the target for executing the selected effect element, is the length at which the selected effect element can be executed a plurality of times. , In the one game time, the selected effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23B, the display duration T2 of the second game time P02 is twice or more the time required for the effect element A (for example, cut-in notice effect A). The pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game time P02. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has the same disengagement symbol A (for example, "1, 2" as the disengagement symbol A stopped at the first game number P01 after the end of the first effect element A in the second game number P02. The symbol pseudo-stop effect of artificially stopping the "3" symbol combination) is executed once. For this reason, it is possible to further enhance the feeling of being seen by the player.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect element of the same content (hereinafter, also referred to as a visual effect notice effect element) that is an object to be executed a plurality of times more times. , It is possible to make the player strongly recognize the sense of sight. In addition, the number of times the effect element for pre-visualization notice is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game, so that the player's expectation can be changed.

Furthermore, since the presentation element for previewing the visual feeling is a production element that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times that can be determined for each game time, the time required for one execution is It is less than or equal to the display duration of one game. Therefore, even if the effect element for predicting the visual sense is executed once in one game, the display continuation time may have an extra time. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the length of the display continuation time of one game is such that the effect element for pre-visualization notice (effect element having the same content) can be executed a plurality of times. In addition, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game, the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

In the above example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the effect element A in each of the consecutive game times until the game time relating to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual advance notice is completed. Although it is executed, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times, for example, the effect element A may be executed only in the game times P01 and P03.

In the following, particularly, when a particular notice effect is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the notice of already seen feeling, the selected notice effect is also referred to as "notice effect for notice of already noticed feeling". In addition, when a symbol stop effect that completely or artificially stops a specific symbol combination is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the visual notice, in the selected symbol stop effect A combination of specific symbols to be stopped or pseudo-stopped is also referred to as a “stop symbol for pre-visualization notice”.

A5-2. Control related to the visual sense notice:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-mentioned notice of feeling of sight in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S1401, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S1402. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step S1402. After executing step S1404, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 25: S1402).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command corresponding process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1501, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502, and the hold command handling process is executed. In the hold command handling process, the above-described process regarding the visual sensation advance notice is executed based on the information set in the hold command. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

In step S1503, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command are received (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504, and effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect executed in the current game time, a stop pattern, a variable display pattern, etc. are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

In step S1505, it is determined whether the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the flow advances to step S1506 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

In step S1507, it is determined whether the ending command is received. If it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has been received (S1507: YES), the flow advances to step S1508 to execute the ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening/closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the effect contents corresponding to the opening command and the effect contents corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 26: S1502).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1601, the update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update processing at the time of winning, the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34, and these holdings A process for allowing the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. In the following, the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the first starting port 33 is also referred to as “first holding number”, and the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the second starting port 34 is It is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, confirmation processing is executed. In the confirmation processing, processing is performed so that the sound-light side MPU 92 can specify whether or not the hold command which is the current read target corresponds to the jackpot, whether or not reach is generated, and the like. Details of the confirmation processing in step S1602 will be described later. After executing step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, the process for previewing the sense of sight is executed. In the process for previewing visual sensation, the process for determining whether or not the condition for generating the visual sensation notice described above is executed, and when the condition for generating the visual sensation preview is satisfied, The setting process for executing the feeling notice is executed. The details of the process for giving a notice of visual sense in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, the present hold command handling process ends.

<Update process at winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1601) of the hold command corresponding process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the sound light is emitted. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in each counter area 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704.

In step S1701, when it is determined that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening. If it is determined that the information is transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the update processing of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. .. The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command that is the current read target. After executing step S1703, the process advances to step S1704.

The reason why the processes in steps S1702 and S1703 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 displays the hold information. While stored and held, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a disadvantage that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described present embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holdings, and the voice light emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the hold command is received. By adopting the configuration in which the information on the contained number of contained pieces is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

In step S1704, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved quantity counter area is a sum of the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step S1704, the update process at the time of the regular winning is completed.

<Confirmation process>
Next, the confirmation process will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1602) of the hold command handling process. It should be noted that, as described above, this confirmation process can be omitted when information such as whether or not the jackpot is won, the jackpot type, and whether or not the reach is generated is already set in the hold command.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the confirmation processing. As described above, the confirmation process is a process executed when it is determined that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the confirmation processing will be described below. The contents of each table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93, which will be described in each of the following steps, are the contents of the win/fail table storage area 63a, the distribution table storage area 63b, and the distribution table storage area 63b of the main ROM 63. The contents are the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

In step S1801, the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold command which is the current read target is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the current winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, when the high-probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, it is determined to be the low-probability mode, and when the high-probability mode flag is stored. , It is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode, that is, the high probability mode. The high probability mode flag is stored when a high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is the low probability mode (S1802: YES), the flow advances to step S1803 to open the low probability mode hit/absence table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. refer. Then, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode hit/miss table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high probability mode hit/miss table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Refer to. Then, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode hit/miss table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S1805, when it is determined that the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806, and the pending command to be read this time is selected. The information on the value of the included jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1807 to refer to the distribution table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. Specifically, when the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the first start opening distribution table is referred to If it is transmitted based on the winning of the starting opening 34, the second starting opening allocation table is referred to.

In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809 to temporarily store the probability variation jackpot information in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S1808: NO), the flow advances to step S1810 to temporarily store normal jackpot information in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation processing is ended.

In step S1805, when it is determined that the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the pending command which is the current read target is selected. The information on the value of the reach random number counter C3 included is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1812 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound-light side ROM 93. After that, the process advances to step S1813, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S1813, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (S1813: YES), the process proceeds to step S1814, and the reach occurrence information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1813 that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (S1813: NO), the present confirmation processing is ended as it is.

<Process for pre-visualization notice>
Next, the process for previewing the sense of sight will be described. The pre-visualization notice process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1603) of the pending command corresponding process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process for previewing a feeling of being seen. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. In step S1901, when it is determined that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S1901: NO), that is, the winning of the second starting opening 34 is won. If it is determined that the data has been transmitted based on, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the first visual feeling advance notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. The first already-visited notice flag is stored when the already-notified notice described above is triggered by the hold information based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and is erased when the already-noticeed notice is ended. It is a flag that is set.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first pre-visualization notice flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process proceeds to step S1903, the first pre-visualization notice flag is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S1904. "0" is set in the counter area for the visual notice of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step S1905.

The counter area for pre-visualization notice specifies, by the sound-light side MPU 92, the number of game times after which the pre-visualization notice is executed when the pre-visualization notice is set to be executed. It is a measuring means for doing. As will be described later, information on the number of holdings is set in the already-visited notice counter area, and is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time a new game is started. When the information stored in the already-visited notice counter area after the update has an initial value of "0", the already-visited notice flag stored at that time is erased.

Here, if the hold command is transmitted based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, in other words, if there is a winning of the second starting opening 34, the first visual feeling notice flag. The reason for deleting will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the holding information related to winning in the second starting opening 34 is prior to the holding information related to winning in the first starting opening 33 and is targeted for the jackpot lottery. When there is a winning in the starting opening 34, the order of the jackpot lottery of the holding information is changed, and the premise of the visual feeling notice that has already been set is broken when the winning in the first starting opening 33 is triggered. Will end up. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning in the second start opening 34, the first pre-visual feeling notice flag is erased to notify the pre-existing visual feeling that the premise is broken. I decided to cancel the execution.

When it is determined in step S1902 that the first pre-visualization notice flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

When it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S1901: YES), step S1902, step S1903 and step The process proceeds to step S1905 without executing S1904, that is, without executing the deletion of the first already-visited notice flag.

In the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 described below, processing regarding the jackpot holding flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the description of the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, the jackpot holding flag, the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area used for determining whether to erase the jackpot holding flag will be described. To do.

The jackpot holding flag includes holding information corresponding to the jackpot in the holding information held and stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit or the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. If it is present, it is information for specifying it by the sound-light side MPU 92. In the erasing process of the jackpot holding flag, in a situation where the jackpot holding flag is stored, both the information stored in the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area, which will be described later, are initial values "0". Will be executed.

When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra, the first erasing counter area becomes the start target of the game number, and the first result display section is used. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Ra in the sound-light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the first erasing counter area is the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra (that is, the winning information to the first starting opening 33). The hold information acquired based on the information is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the game time is newly started.

When the holding information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display section, the second erasing counter area becomes the start target of the game number, and the holding information is for the second result display section. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Rb in the sound-light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the second erasing counter area is the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb (that is, the winning information to the second starting opening 34). The hold information acquired based on the information is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the game time is newly started. Hereinafter, it returns to the description of the process regarding the jackpot holding flag.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read this time is a pending command corresponding to the jackpot. If it is determined in step S1905 that the pending command to be read this time is the pending command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the pending command to be read this time is the first command. It is determined whether or not the data has been transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33.

When it is determined in step S1906 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S1906: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907, and The information on the first reserved number included in the reserved command to be read is specified, and the specified information on the first reserved number is set in the first erase counter area. After executing step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1909.

When it is determined in step S1906 that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening. If it is determined that the information is transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1908, and the second reserved number information included in the command that is the current read target is specified and 2 Information on the number of reserved pieces is set in the second erasing counter area. After executing step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909.

In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot holding flag is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot holding flag is stored (S1909: YES), this holding command handling process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot holding flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the flow advances to step S1910 to store the jackpot holding flag in the sound-light side RAM 94. After executing step S1910, the process proceeds to step S1912.

In step S1905, when it is determined that the hold command that is the current read target is not the hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not there is.

When it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot holding flag is not stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot holding flag is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), this holding command handling process is ended.

As described in the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot holding flag is already stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES), the visual perception Various settings for executing the notice are not made. As a result, in the situation where the holding information corresponding to the jackpot is already stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main control device 60, the first starting opening 33 or the Even if new hold information is acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, various settings for executing the notice of the sense of sight are not made.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the sound-light side RAM 94 stores the first pre-visualization notice flag. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first already-visited notice flag is stored (S1912: YES), this hold command handling process is ended. That is, when the first already-visited notice flag is stored, the already-noticeed notice occurrence lottery process in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first pre-visualization notice flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the flow proceeds to step S1913.

In step S1913, it is determined whether or not the second light sensation notice flag is stored in the sound-light-side RAM 94. In step S1913, when it is determined that the second already-visited notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), the holding command handling process is ended. That is, when the second already-visual-feeling notice flag is stored, the already-feeling-preliminary notice occurrence lottery process in step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1913 that the second pre-visualization notice flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

That is, in a situation in which it has already been set to execute the visual sensation notice based on either the hold information related to the winning of the first starting opening 33 or the hold information related to the winning of the second starting opening 34. Does not make a new setting for executing the notice of the sense of sight even if a new hold command is received.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S1914 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915 and the total hold is executed. It is determined whether or not the number of holdings measured in the number counter area is two or more.

If it is determined in step S1915 that the total pending number is two or more (S1915: YES), the flow advances to step S1917 to execute a visual sense advance notice generation lottery process. Details of the visual advance notice generation lottery process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of pending numbers is not two or more (S1915: NO), this pending command handling process is terminated without executing the already-visited notice occurrence lottery process of step S1917. ..

In step S1914, when it is determined that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening. If it is determined that the information is transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S1916, and it is determined whether or not the number of holdings measured in the second holding number counter area is two or more. ..

If it is determined in step S1916 that the second number of holdings is two or more (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917, and the visual sense advance notice generation lottery process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the second number of holdings is not equal to or more than two, then the present visual sensation advance notice process is terminated without executing the visual sensation advance notice generation lottery process in step S1917.

That is, when the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, the visual advance notice is given only when the total hold number is two or more. The generated lottery process is executed. On the other hand, when the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, the visual sense of presence is present only when the second hold number is two or more. The notice generation lottery process is executed. The reason for this is that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses two or more game times to execute the visual sensation advance notice. When the hold command is transmitted based on the winning of the second start opening 34, the reason for using the second hold number as a reference is that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment uses the second start opening 34. This is because the holding information acquired by the winning of No. 1 is prior to the holding information acquired by the winning of the first starting opening 33 and is targeted for the jackpot lottery.

<Lottery process for notice of visual sensation>
Next, a description will be given of the pre-visualization notice occurrence lottery process. The visual sense advance notice generation lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: S1917) of the visual sense advance notice process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the visual sense advance notice occurrence lottery process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pending command that is the current read target corresponds to a big hit or reach occurrence. When it is determined in step S2001 that neither the big hit nor the reach occurrence is supported (S2001: NO), the present visual sensation notice occurrence lottery process is ended. On the other hand, in step S2001, when it is determined that the jackpot or reach is generated (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and a random number counter for pre-visualization notice is output from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94. In addition to reading the value (numerical value information), it refers to the existing visual sensation warning occurrence table stored in the existing visual sensation warning occurrence table storage area 93b of the sound-light-side ROM 93, and in step S2003, the read previous visual sensation warning is issued. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the winning notice of the feeling of being seen.

Note that the probability of winning the notice of the presence of the visual feeling can be set arbitrarily. For example, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to refer to the big hit visual perception advance notice occurrence table when a hold command corresponding to the big hit is received, and the big hit visual perception The advance notice generation table is set so that the reservation advance notice generation wins with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when the hold command corresponding to the reach occurrence is received, it is configured to refer to the already-existing visual advance notice occurrence table for reach. It is set so that there is a probability of 1 that the reservation notice is generated.

When it is determined in step S2003 that the random number counter value for visual sense advance notice does not correspond to the visual sense advance notice occurrence winning (S2003: NO), the present visual sense advance notice occurrence lottery process is ended. On the other hand, in step S2003, when it is determined that the random number counter value for the visual sense advance notice corresponds to the visual sense advance notice occurrence winning (S2003: YES), the condition for generating the visual sense advance notice is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to step S2004.

In step S2004, a process of determining a notice effect for notice of a feeling of being seen is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical value information) for advance notice effect is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94, and is stored in the already-explained notice advance notice effect table storage area 93c of the sound-light side ROM 93. The notice effect table for notice of the existing feeling is referred to, and the notice effect for notice of the existing feeling corresponding to the random number counter value for the notice effect is determined. In the notice effect table for notice of already seen feeling, the content of the notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display durations stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63 and the random number counter for the notice effect. The values are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the notice effect random number counter value determined by lottery and the notice effect notice notice table for visual perception are used to determine the notice effect for visual sense announcement. The predetermined predetermined notice effect may be used as a notice effect for giving a notice of a visual sense. In this case, the predetermined predetermined notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration of the display durations stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63. Further, for example, the notice effect for the notice of the visual sense this time is the notice effect A, and the notice effect for the notice of the visual feeling to be decided next time when the condition for generating the notice of the visual feeling is satisfied is the notice effect B. In addition, the order of the notice effect for the notice of the already-visible feeling to be determined may be set in advance. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 can employ various methods to intentionally and actively determine the type and content of the notice effect for the notice of the already-perceived visual sense executed at each game time.

After executing step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the type information of the decided notice effect for the notice of visual feeling is stored in the notice effect storage area 94d for notice of visual feeling of the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step S2006.

In step S2006, a process of determining a stop symbol for pre-visualization notice is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value for stop symbols (numerical value information) is read from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound-light side RAM 94, and is stored in the stop pattern table storage area 93d for notice of visual perception in the sound-light side ROM 93. By referring to the already-appearing notice stop symbol table, the stop symbol corresponding to the random number counter value for the stop symbol is determined. In addition, the stop design for the disengagement result is determined as the stop design for the visual sense notice. After executing step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007, and the type information of the determined stop symbol for the visual notice is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step S2008.

In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, and the sound light is emitted. The first already-visual feeling notice flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2010, and the information stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is set in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. After that, the processing for previewing the sense of already seen is completed. As a result, the pending information related to the first starting opening 33 is set as a trigger to set the state in which the notice of the sense of sight is to be executed.

When it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011 and the sound/light side. A second already-visual feeling notice flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the information stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is set in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. After that, the processing for previewing the sense of already seen is completed. As a result, the pending information related to the second starting opening 34 is set as a trigger to set the state in which the notice of the sense of sight is to be executed.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 26: S1504) of the command corresponding process.

32 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. .. Hereinafter, a specific process of the effect setting process will be described.

In step S2101, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence and the information of the display continuation time are specified from the command, and the type command received this time is read out from the command, and the 16R probability variation jackpot is detected. Information on the result of the jackpot lottery, such as information, information on the 8R probability variation jackpot, information on the 16R regular jackpot, information on the 8R regular jackpot, or information on the out-of-range result is specified. Then, in step S2101, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not a jackpot is won, information on a jackpot type if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not a reach is generated if the jackpot is not hit, and a display duration time. Information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side RAM 94 stores the pre-visualization notice flag. When it is determined in step S2102 that the already-visited notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, when the condition for generating the already-visited notice is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2103 and the already-feeled Executes the effect setting process corresponding to the notice. In the process, the notice effect for the notice of the sense of sight determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed in the current game time in which the notice of the sense of sight is executed, and the notice of the sense of sight determined in S2006 in FIG. 31 is executed. It is set to execute the symbol stop effect using the stop symbol for. The details of the effect setting process corresponding to the notice of previous visual feeling will be described later.

When it is determined in step S2102 that the already-visited notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2104, and the notice effect generation lottery process is executed. In the notice effect generation lottery process, it is determined by a lottery whether or not the normal notice effect is executed in this game time. Normal notice production can occur at both game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. Is also set to occur with a high probability. Further, in the notice production generating lottery process, the notice times are more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to the big hits than in the game times corresponding to the deviation result, and further, the notice effects having a low appearance rate are likely to occur. Draw lots. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the announcement effect has been won as a result of the announcement effect generation lottery process in step S2104. When it is determined in step S2105 that the advance notice effect has been won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the winn notice effect is set to be executed in this game time. Then, it progresses to step S2107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2105 that the advance notice effect has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

In step S2107, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the process of setting a stop symbol, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, the same symbol on the activated line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the stop symbol information of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former selects more than the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R certainty variation jackpot. If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the content of the variation command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is not supported, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the display duration of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information of the display duration, the information of the variation display time included in the display duration, And the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbols specified in step S2107 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to.

After the effect setting process corresponding to the notice of the visual sense is executed in step S2103, or the variable display pattern is set in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the type information of the notice effect, the number of executions of the notice effect, the type information of the stop symbol, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in the current game time are set in the effect command. Then, it progresses to step S2110 and transmits the said production|generation command to the display side MPU102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111, after performing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the present effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Direction setting process corresponding to the visual notice>
Next, a description will be given of a process of setting an effect corresponding to the notice of the visual sense. The effect setting process corresponding to the visual advance notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the effect corresponding to the notice of the visual sense. As described above, the present setting process is a process executed when the current game time is one of the plurality of game times for which the visual feeling notice is executed, and is executed in the current game time. It is a process of setting a notice effect, a symbol stop effect, and a variable display pattern. The processing of each step executed in this setting processing will be described below.

In step S2201, the type information of the notice effect for notice of visual feeling stored in the notice effect storage area 94d for notice of visual feeling of the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the type information of the stop symbol for the visual advance notice stored in the sound-light side RAM 94 is grasped. Then, it progresses to step S2203.

In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light-side RAM 94 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the game time to be executed this time is the game time related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game times related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the notice of visual feeling are game times related to the jackpot or the reach occurrence. Therefore, in the case of the game time related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied, a relatively long display duration time is set.

In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is not "1" (S2203: NO), that is, the game time to be executed this time is that the condition for occurrence of already-visited notice is If the game time is not related to the held information that has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204, and within the display duration time of the game time to be executed this time, the notice effect for pre-visualization notice grasped in step S2201 can be executed multiple times. Or not.

In step S2204, when it is determined that the notice effect for notice of the visual sense cannot be executed a plurality of times within the display duration time (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205 and the notice effect for notice of the visual sense is set to 1 Set to run once. Then, it progresses to step S2208.

In step S2204, when it is determined that the notice effect for pre-visualization notice can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration time (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206, and the notice effect for pre-visualization notice is given. Set to run multiple times. Specifically, if it is possible to execute the notice effect for the visual sense notice twice within the display duration, the notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the visual sense is displayed within the display duration time. When the notice effect for notice can be executed three times, the notice effect is set to be executed three times. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to execute the notice effect for the notice of the visual sense up to three times in one game. However, the maximum number of notice effects executed in one game may be set to once, twice, or four times or more.

Further, the number of executions of the notice effect for previewing the visual feeling within the display duration of the current game time is set to M times, and the number of actual executions of the notice effect for previewing the visual feeling in the current game time is N. In the case of the number of times, the relationship between M and N is not limited to M=N. The value of N can be arbitrarily set as long as it satisfies the relationship of M≧N≧1. For example, when the number of executions of the notice effect for notice of the visual feeling within the display duration time of this game time is 5 times, the number of actual executions of the notice effect for notice of the existing visual feeling is 5 times or more. It can be arbitrarily set within a range of once. The value of N can be determined by various methods such as determination by lottery and determination using table data in which M and N are associated with each other. In this way, the number of executions of effect elements having the same content can be intentionally and actively determined.

After executing step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207, and in the current game time, after executing the notice effect for notice of the visual sense, the stop pattern for notice of the visual sense grasped in step S2202 is pseudo-stopped. Set to execute the symbol pseudo stop effect. Then, it progresses to step S2208.

After executing step S2205 or step S2207, in step S2208, the stop symbol for the notice of the visual sense grasped in step S2202 is set as the stop symbol in the current game time. Then, it progresses to step S2212.

When it is determined in step S2203 that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is "1" (S2201: YES), that is, the game time to be executed this time is the already-visited notice occurrence condition. If it is a game time related to the held information that is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209, and the notice effect for the visual sense notice is set to be executed once, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect, battle effect, jackpot or The result effect corresponding to the deviation result is set to be executed in this game time. As described above, since the game times related to the hold information satisfying the condition for generating the visual sensation notice are game times related to the jackpot or the reach occurrence, a relatively long display duration time is set. When selecting each type of suggestive effect, battle effect, and result effect, within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the notice effect for pre-visualization notice from the display continuation time set in this game time Select a combination of productions that can be executed. After executing step S2209, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2210, in the current game, after executing the notice effect for previewing the visual sense, the symbol pseudo stop effect for pseudoly stopping the stop pattern for previewing the visual sense grasped in step S2202 is executed. Set to. Then, it progresses to step S2211.

In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery of the current game is set. The details of the process of setting the stop symbol are the same as the process in step S2107 of FIG. 32, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Then, it progresses to step S2212.

In step S2212, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the display duration of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, the information of the display duration, the information of the variation display time included in the display duration, And, the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbols for the notice of the visual sense specified in step S2202 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, the present setting process ends.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2111) of the effect setting process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the update process at the start of fluctuation. In the processing from step S2301 to step S2311 described below, along with the start of the game, the counter values in various holding number counter areas are updated, and processing related to deleting the jackpot holding flag is executed.

The jackpot holding flag is, as already described, a jackpot in the holding information held and stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main controller 60. It is a flag that is stored when corresponding pending information is included. Further, in the first erasing counter area, when the holding information corresponding to the big hit is stored, in the first result display holding area Ra, the order in which the holding information is the start target of the game number is Is stored. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the second erasing counter area, in the second result display holding area Rb, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game number is Is stored. Therefore, when both the value of the first erasing counter area and the value of the second erasing counter area are “0” as the initial value, the first result display section holding area Ra of the main controller 60 or This means that the pending information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the pending information held and stored in the second result display holding area Rb. In this case, the jackpot holding flag is erased. The processing of each step executed in the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described below.

In step S2301, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is the first variation command (S2302: YES), the flow advances to step S2303 to subtract 1 from the number of holdings stored in the first holding number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94. As described above, the information in the first reserved quantity counter area is updated. Then, it progresses to step S2304.

In step S2304, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasing counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is 1 or more. When it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is 1 or more (S2304: YES), the process proceeds to step S2305 and the value stored in the first erasing counter area. The information in the first erasing counter area is updated so that is subtracted by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2309.

When it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is not 1 or more (S2304: NO), steps S2305, 09 to step S2311 are not executed, and the process proceeds to step S2312.

When it is determined in step S2302 that it is not the first variation command (S2302: NO), that is, when the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2306, and the sound-light side RAM 94 is stored. The information in the second reserved quantity counter area is updated so that the reserved quantity stored in the second reserved quantity counter area is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasing counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is "1" or more. When it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308 and the value stored in the second erasing counter area. The information in the second erasing counter area is updated so that is subtracted by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2309.

When it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not 1 or more (S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2308 and 09 to step S2311.

In step S2309, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0". When it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is “0” (S2309: YES), the process proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasing counter area is not "0" (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. ..

In step S2310, it is determined whether the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0". When it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0" (S2310: YES), the process proceeds to step S2311 and the jackpot holding flag is erased. That is, when the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0" and the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0", the jackpot holding flag is erased. .. Then, it progresses to step S2312. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not "0" (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

In the processing from step S2312 to step S2317, which will be described next, processing relating to the deletion of the already-visited notice flag is executed. The specific processing will be described below.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light-side RAM 94 is "1" or more. If it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is not "1" or more (S2312: NO), the updating process at the start of this variation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is "1" or more (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, the information of the visual sensation advancement counter area is updated so that the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area of the sound-light-side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2314.

In step S2314, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is "0". If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is not "0", the updating process at the start of this variation ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2315.

In step S2315, it is determined whether the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is the first variation command, the flow advances to step S2316 to erase the first already-visited notice flag in the sound-light side RAM 94. After that, the update process at the start of this variation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that it is not the first variation command, that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process advances to step S2317, and the second visible image of the sound-light side RAM 94 is viewed. Clear the feeling warning flag. After that, the update process at the start of this variation is terminated.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the voice light emission control device 90 and a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice light emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2401, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step S2402.

In step S2402, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storing process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and displayed on the VDP 105. Execute display instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the inside image information is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S2601, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 36), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

When the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is in the reception period for the depression of the production operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is in the reception period for the depression of the production operation button 24, the production operation is performed. The control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command handling process (S2601), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41.

In step S2602, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S2601) or the like. .. Then, it progresses to step S2603.

In step S2603, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (S2602), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step S2604.

In step S2604, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received at the immediately preceding V interruption process on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S2605 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times for the player. It can give a sense of déjà vu. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences winning the jackpot after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect elements are executed in the expectation that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time I play, I always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied and the visual sensation notice is to be executed, the type and content of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times are intended. Can be set as desired. In addition, it is possible to intentionally set the number of times the same effect element is executed. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to arbitrarily set the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the visual sensation advance notice when the jackpot is won or when the reach occurs.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content and executed a plurality of times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times over time. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example of increasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times with the passage of time. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game time P01 and also executes the effect element A in the next game time P02, so that the same effect is executed a plurality of times. The number of elements is one. The pachinko machine 10 further executes the effect element B in addition to the effect element A in the game time P02, and also executes the effect element A and the effect element B in the next game time P03. The number of content rendering elements is two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times over time. With this configuration, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with the lapse of time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

In the example shown in FIG. 38, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content and executed a plurality of times has been described, but the control may be decreased. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's sense of expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives the expectation to the player's sense of expectation. You can make a difference.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment described above is the content of processing relating to the notice of a sense of sight. In the following description, mainly, the notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of the previous notice of visual sense executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B) show Example 1 and Example 2, which are two examples of the visual sensation notice in the present embodiment.

In the example 1, when the total reserved quantity CRN is 2, the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 and the total reserved quantity CRN becomes 3, and the pending information related to the winning indicates the condition of occurrence of the visual advance notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P03 shown as the third game time is the game time relating to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

When the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling, the pachinko machine 10 has a game time prior to the game time P03 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling. The content of the game effect A executed in P01 is stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the content of the game effect A to be executed in the game time P01 that is subsequently executed after it is determined that the hold information of the game time P03 satisfies the occurrence of the notice of the visual feeling. Then, the game times P02, which are the game times after the game times P01 in which the content of the game effect A is stored, and which are the game times before the game times P03 related to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice. And, in the game time P03, the contents of the game effect A stored in the game time P01 are reproduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the "effect element" having the same content is executed a plurality of times as the notice of the sense of sight, but in the present embodiment, it is composed of the effect elements executed in the game time P01. The "game production" is executed multiple times as one unit. That is, exactly the same game effect as the game time P01 is reproduced as it is for a certain period of time in each of the game times P02 and P03. By doing so, it becomes possible to give the player a feeling of being already seen.

Further, in the game cycle P03, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed, as in the first embodiment. Then, after stopping the jackpot pattern in the game cycle P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

Specific processing will be described. When it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P03 has satisfied the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game effect A for the game effect A of the game time P01 to be executed thereafter. Various setting data for performing is stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating the hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, command setting data to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like.

After the game cycle P01 ends, the voice emission control device 90 actually executes the game performance based on the stored various setting data for executing the game performance A at the start of the game cycle P02 (various types). The lamp 47, the speaker 46, etc.) are controlled. Immediately before the start of the game time P02, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information related to the game time P02, but the audio emission control device 90 hard-plays the game effect B at the start of the game time P02. The game effect A is preferentially executed without being executed in the manner that appears in the behavior of the wear. The process based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as an internal process in a range that does not appear in the behavior of the hardware (various lamps 47, speakers 46, etc.) that executes the game effect.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), when the display continuation time of the game time P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the sound emission control device 90 causes the game time P02 to play. At the same time as the execution of the effect A is completed, the process based on the setting data of the game effect B, which has been executed as an internal process within the range that does not appear as the behavior of the hardware, is switched to the process that appears as the behavior of the hardware. That is, in the game cycle P02, the player recognizes that the game effect B has been executed halfway after the game effect A has been executed. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is performed. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 executes the pre-visual feeling notice shown in Example 1.

Next, a second example of the notice of a sense of sight in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2 as well, as in Example 1, a game ball wins the first starting opening 33 at a timing when the total reserved quantity CRN is 2 and the total reserved quantity CRN becomes 3, and the pending information related to the winning is already viewed. This shows the case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game time P13 shown as the third game time is the game time relating to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

In Example 2, the sound emission control device 90 stores the content of the game effect C1 which is the game effect during a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game cycle P11. Then, the game time P12 is a game time after the game time P11 in which the content of the game effect C1 is stored, and is a game time before the game time P13 related to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice. And, in the game cycle P13, the content of the stored game effect C1 is reproduced. Specifically, since the display duration of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the audio emission control device 90 causes the game time P12 to be a part of the stored game effect C1 during the game. The game effect C1a, which is an effect, is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display continuation time of the game time P13 is longer than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces the entire contents of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P13. Further, in the game cycle P13, after the game effect C1 is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed. Then, after stopping the jackpot pattern in the game cycle P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

As a specific process, when it is determined that the hold information related to the game cycle P13 satisfies the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling, the sound emission control device 90 executes the game executed after satisfying the condition for generating the notice of previous visual feeling. Various setting data for executing the game effect C1 which is the game effect for a part of the period of the game effect C in the time P11 is stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating the hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, command setting data to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the length (time) of the stored game effect is set in advance, the display duration of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length, so that a part of the game time C0 The game effect C1 which is the game effect for the period is stored.

Furthermore, since the display duration of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 has a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P12. The game effect C1a is reproduced. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is performed. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 gives the pre-visual feeling notice shown in Example 2.

In the above description, the sound emission control device 90 stores the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100 to reproduce the game effect executed in the game time P01 in the game times after the game time P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game time P01 as it is in the buffer, and in the game times after the game time P01, the stored moving image data is displayed again for display control. The device 100 may be transmitted to the symbol display device 41 and reproduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, at least a part of the period, the game effect having the completely same content is played. Will experience. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of being already seen.

Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the player who has recognized the existing sensation may have a special meaning with respect to the existing sensation, or, for example, may be given a privilege. You will have a feeling of expectation. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times, the game effect is executed in the expectation that the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times. Every time, I always pay attention to the game production with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately raise the player's attention to the game effects that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

As shown in FIGS. 39(A) and 39(B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced. It is executed after the game effect of the content of is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced, and to convince the player that the game effect having the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the target of the game effect to be stored and reproduced. When reproduced as a game effect, the operation acceptance effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect as the game effect to be stored and reproduced, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain sense of sight.

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment described above is the content of processing relating to the notice of a sense of sight. In the following description, mainly, the notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an example of the previous notice of visual sense executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 40A and 40B show two examples, i.e., example 1 and example 2, of the visual sensation notice in the present embodiment. In the example 1, the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 at a timing when the total reserved quantity CRN is 3 and the total reserved quantity CRN is 4, and the pending information related to the winning is the condition of occurrence of a visual notice. It shows the case where it is satisfied. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time relating to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the example 1, when the hold information related to the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice, the continuation before the game time P04 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice. A total time of the shortest display continuation times that can be determined as the display continuation times T1, T2, T3, T4 of the plurality of game times, that is, the game times P01, P02, P03, and P04, is calculated. The display duration of each of the game times P01 to P04 actually determined is set to Tre (Tre=T1+T2+T3+T4), and the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of each of the game times P01 to P04. If the total time is Tsum, the relationship of Tsum≦Tre is established.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 provides the effect elements of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the calculated total time Tsum until the game time P04 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice ends. Run multiple times. In the example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 is a production element of the same content that can be executed multiple times within a time Tsum that is less than or equal to the time Tre that is the display duration of each actually determined game time P01 to P04. A, effect element B, and effect element C are executed. Further, in the game cycle P04, after the game effect A is executed, a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (in this example, a victory effect) are executed.

The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, the rendering elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the rendering element A, then the rendering element A and the rendering element B, and then the rendering element A, the rendering element B, and the rendering element C. The number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times is increased over time.

Further, as shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1, the effect element A that is executed the second time, the third time, and the fourth time is executed across game times. That is, the timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped and the timing at which one effect element A ends are different. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display surface 41 a when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is executing the visual sensation advance notice. In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is divided into the display area 41aS and the display area 41aL when the notice of the sense of sight is executed. Then, in the display area 41aS, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. The variable display and the stop display of the symbols in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display continuation time of each of the game times P01 to P04.

On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, displays corresponding to the effect elements A, the effect elements B, and the effect elements C are displayed. As the effect element A, for example, an effect element based on an image using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, a moving image is displayed as a background image of the display area 41aL, and a moving image including a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image is displayed. As the effect elements B and C, for example, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a background image are usually used. Background change notice effect that changes to a mode different from time, feature effect notice effect that causes a predetermined role object to perform a predetermined action, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and a pattern row in a predetermined scroll pattern Examples include a symbol sequence variation effect that is changed, a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol line while stopping two identical symbols on at least one activated line, and the like. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot effect to be executed after the game cycle P04 is finished is executed by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

As described using FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL, and variable display and stop display of symbols in the display area 41aS and effect elements in the display area 41aL. By executing the display in different cycles, the cycle of variable display and stop display of the symbols (that is, the cycle synchronized with the actual display duration), and the effect element A, effect element B and effect element C are executed. It is possible to make the cycle different.

Next, a second example of the notice of a sense of sight in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2 as well, as in Example 1, when the total reserved number CRN is 3, the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the pending information related to the winning is already viewed. This shows the case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game time P14 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

In Example 2, the time required for the effect element A that is a target to be executed a plurality of times is longer than the display continuation time of the game time P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A once over the game times. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the effect element A as an effect element that can be executed three times within the total time Tsum of the shortest display durations that can be determined as the display durations of the four game times P11 to P14. .. As shown in Example 2, the number of game times required to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times (in Example 2, four game times) and the number of execution times of the effect element having the same content (Example 2 , The effect element A may be three times). The type of effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content and the number of times of execution thereof may be determined according to the value of the calculated total time Tsum. In this case, it is possible to use table data in which the total time Tsum is associated with the type of effect element and the number of executions to determine the type of effect element to be executed a plurality of times and the number of executions of the same content.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display durations that can be determined as the display duration of each game time. Since the effect element of is executed, one time of the effect element to be executed multiple times can be finished within the display continuation time (T1, T2, T3, T4) which is the time actually required for one game time. Not limited. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times over a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time relating to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the notice of the visual sense. As shown in Example 2, it is also possible to execute one production element A, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, across game times. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the execution time for one effect element and the display continuation time for one game time.

Furthermore, since the effect elements having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times are executed a plurality of times within the shortest total display duration time (Tsum) that can be determined, it is possible to execute the effect elements having the same content a plurality of times. The required time is equal to or shorter than the total time (Tre) of the actual display duration of each game time. Therefore, it is possible to run out of time when executing the effect element of the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time relating to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice. It is possible to avoid and surely execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times.

Further, similarly to the first embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), it is already seen that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player. It can give a feeling (dejab). The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed plural times, the effect elements are executed in the expectation that the effect elements having the same content are executed plural times. Every time, I always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

As shown in FIGS. 40(A) and 40(B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect elements having the same content have been reproduced. It is executed after the effect element having the content of is executed plural times. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the fact that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of effect elements having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain sense of sight.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image, which is a moving image display as a background image in the display area 41aL, as effect elements to be executed a plurality of times with the same content. Video display, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying an object image such as a predetermined character in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a mode different from normal time, reach effect, Also, the player is already seen by using various effect elements such as effects by physically operating accessory provided on the front door frame 14 or the game board 30 and effects by lighting or blinking by various lamps 47. It can give a feeling. Therefore, the player's attention as to whether or not the effect element having the same content is executed plural times can be directed to various effect elements.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times. In Example 1 of the present embodiment, first the effect element A is executed, the number of effect elements having the same content is 1, and then the game effect B is executed so that the number of effect elements having the same content is 2. Then, the rendering element C is executed, and the number of rendering elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is performed, but the control may be decreased. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times, and adds to the expectation of the player. You can make a difference.

In addition, in the example 1 of the present embodiment, first, only the rendering element A, then the rendering element A and the rendering element B, and then the rendering element A, the rendering element B, and the rendering element C After it is determined that the condition for generating the feeling notice has been satisfied, until the game time (game time P04) related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the feeling notice has ended, the same content to be executed multiple times The number of effect elements is increasing over time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of sight increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment described above is the content of processing relating to the notice of a sense of sight. In the following description, mainly, the notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. Hereinafter, a specific process in this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of a notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual feeling based on the hold information is satisfied, before the hold information is targeted for the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual feeling based on the hold information is satisfied, when the hold information is targeted for the jackpot lottery. That is, the determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual acuity based on the hold information is satisfied, and the jackpot lottery based on the hold information are performed immediately before the game time P01 related to the hold information is started.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as an embodiment of the notice of the visual sense, execution of the effect element having the same content is performed a plurality of times over a plurality of game times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, as an aspect of the notice of visual sense, the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time are included. , Is executed a plurality of times in one game game P01 related to the hold information that is determined to satisfy the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual feeling. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice in the game time P01. More specifically, the rendering elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the rendering element A, then the rendering element A and the rendering element B, and then the rendering element A, the rendering element B, and the rendering element C. The number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times is increased over time.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, like the first embodiment, executes the effect element A a plurality of times as a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Run later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes the battle effect and the result effect (winning effect) after executing the suggestion effect. Then, after the game number P01 is over, the big hit effect is executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time is repeated a plurality of times with the same content. Since it is executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of being seen in one game. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player is given a sense of a dive that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after executing the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. To do. Therefore, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the fact that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of effect elements having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain sense of sight.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the effect element A is first executed, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and then the game effect B is executed so that the number of effect elements having the same content is two. By executing the effect element C, the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is performed, but the control may be decreased. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times, and adds to the expectation of the player. You can make a difference.

Further, in the present embodiment, first, only the production element A, next the production element A and the production element B, and then the production element A, the production element B, and the production element C, which are the same, are executed a plurality of times. The number of presentation elements of the content is increased with the passage of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of sight increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

E. Fifth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment described above is the content of processing relating to the notice of a sense of sight. In the following description, mainly, the notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the above embodiment, the control of the display continuation time of each game time based on the determination as to whether or not to execute the visual sense notice is not performed. In the present embodiment, in the case of executing an already-visited notice, at least two game times out of the game times before the game times related to the hold information for which the already-visited notice occurrence condition is satisfied, Control is performed so as to secure a display duration of a predetermined length. Then, in each game time in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured, the effect elements having the same content that can be executed within the secured display duration of the predetermined length are executed. The details will be described below.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of processing executed by the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the processing content that the voice emission control device 90 executed as the hold command corresponding process in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device 60 executes the visual sense advance notice occurrence lottery process. Then, in the case of winning the visual sense notice generation lottery, for example, when executing the visual sense notice by using three game times, regarding the display continuation time of the three game times, Reserve a certain length for the execution of the notice. Specifically, in the main control device 60, when determining the display duration of each of the three game times for executing the notice of the visual sense, the value of the variation type counter CS for each of the three game times, In collation with the display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, execution of the visual sensation advance notice previously stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d as the display continuation time table used for the collation. Use the display duration table for.

The main control device 60 controls and decides the display duration of three game times to the length for executing the notice of visual feeling, and then emits a sound by using the information of the determined display duration of each game as a command. It is transmitted to the control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 determines the effect elements of the same executable content within the display duration time of each game time, the length of which has been secured in the main control device 60 for the purpose of executing the visual sensation advance notice. By doing so, it is possible to control the length of the display continuation time of the game time so as to execute the previous notice of visual feeling.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display duration of a predetermined length is secured for execution of the visual advance notice, and the display duration of a predetermined length is secured. Since the same effect elements that can be executed in each game time are executed, the time required to execute the same effect elements is avoided in each game time, and the same content is surely achieved in each game time. Can be performed.

Further, as the effect elements used for the visual advance notice, there are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of the background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of the background image, and a background image. Background change notice effect that changes to a different mode from normal time, character notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit a predetermined pattern, symbol row with a predetermined scroll pattern Fluctuating symbol row production, reach production that fluctuates the remaining one symbol row while stopping two identical symbols on at least one activated line, and symbol stop that stops a predetermined combination of symbols It is possible to adopt effects and the like. Since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times as the notice of visual sense is executed after executing the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. To do. It is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and to let the player have a special meaning that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be convinced.

Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times. By increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content that are executed multiple times, it is possible to increase or decrease the player's expectation, or to change the player's expectation, for example, by changing the expectation. it can.

Furthermore, the production of the same content to be executed a plurality of times during the period from the time when it is determined that the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied to the end of the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice. The number of elements may be increased over time. Since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing feeling increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

Further, in the present embodiment, first, the display duration of each game time for executing the visual sensation notice is determined, and thereafter, the effect element to be executed as the visual sensation notice is determined based on the determined display duration. Although it is decided to decide, other processing forms can be adopted without being limited to such a processing form.

For example, it is possible to first determine the effect element to be executed as an already-vized notice, and then secure a display duration of a length that allows execution of the effect element to be performed as already-vized notice at each game. .. As a specific process, for example, when the main control device 60 decides to execute the visual sensation advance notice lottery processing and decides to execute the visual sensation advance notice, the same content is executed first as the existing sensation advance notice. Determine the elements. After that, the main control device 60 secures a display continuation time of a length that enables execution of effect elements having the same content as a notice of a feeling of sight in each game. Then, the main control device 60 transmits, to the audio emission control device 90, as a command, the display duration of each game time for executing the visual sensation notice and the content of the effect element to be executed as the visual sensation notice.

By adopting such a processing form, it is possible to secure a display continuation time of a length capable of executing the effect element having the same content in each game time, so the time required to execute the same effect element It is possible to avoid shortage in each game time and surely execute the same effect element in each game time.

F. Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and the content of processing relating to a notice of a sense of sight. In the following description, mainly, the notice of a sense of sight that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information and also has a function of executing a time-linked effect element that is an effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the acquired time information. .. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock) and acquires time information from the RTC module. The acquisition of the time information is not limited to the acquisition from the RTC module, and other methods that are technically possible to acquire the time information, such as acquisition from the outside of the pachinko machine 10, may be adopted.

Further, in the present description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, the effect elements that are continuously executed based on the time information with the passage of time are referred to as “time-interlocking effect elements”, and the effect elements are not based on the time information. The effect elements that are executed without being called are called "non-time-interlocking effect elements".

FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of the previous notice of visual sense executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 44 also shows, as a comparison target, a time-interlocking effect element executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10 installed in the same gaming hall as the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines start executing the time-linked effect element at time T0. Then, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element with the passage of time. In this description, the other pachinko machine executes a series of preset time-linked effect elements. For convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the time position of the series of time-linked effect elements, the time position as an index indicating the time position of the time-linked effect element is included in the series of time-linked effect elements executed by other pachinko machines. TP1 to TP20 are illustrated. In addition, each time position shown in the figure is described in a format in which the symbol "TP" is omitted.

As shown in the figure, in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 at a timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the pending information related to the winning is already viewed. It shows a case where the condition for generating the feeling notice is satisfied and the feeling notice is executed. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time relating to the reservation information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

The pachinko machine 10 stores, as a specific temporal position, the temporal position TP of the time-interlocking effect element that is executed at the timing when the game time P01 is started after it is determined that the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied. .. In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the temporal position TP3 of the time-interlocking effect element as the specific temporal position. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is a game time that is started to be executed after it is determined that the condition for generating the previous visual feeling notice is satisfied, and the game time P04 before the game time P04 related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the previous visual feeling notice. With the timing of starting each of the game times of the game times P01, P02, P03, and P04, which are the game times of the time, the time-interlocking effect element is a specific time position stored in advance. The target position TP3 is executed as the start position.

Further, as shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied, and when the non-time interlocking effect element is executed together with the time interlocking effect element, the time interlocking time element is executed. The effect element and the non-time-interlocking effect element are executed multiple times. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element (the time-interlocking effect element and the non-time-interlocking effect element) a plurality of times, and then executes the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the same effect element has been executed a plurality of times. To do. Then, after the suggestion effect is executed, the battle effect and the result effect (winning effect) are executed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements that are executed multiple times. In the present embodiment, the non-time interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times are only the non-time interlocking effect element A in the game time P01, the non-time interlocking effect element A and the non-time interlocking effect element B in the game time P02, and the game time P03. Then, non-time interlocking effect element A, non-time interlocking effect element B, non-time interlocking effect element C, and game times P04 also include non-time interlocking effect element A, non-time interlocking effect element B, non-time interlocking effect element C, and so on. The number of non-time-interlocking effect elements having the same content that are executed a plurality of times is increased over time.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed multiple times, so that the player is provided with an effect with a new interest. Can be provided. In addition, since the time-linked effect element executed at least in a part of the period is executed multiple times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times (dejab). Can be given. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element has been executed multiple times, the time-linked effect element is executed in the expectation that the time effect element is executed multiple times. Every time, I always pay attention to the time-linked effect elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and appropriately increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, The interest of the game can be improved.

Further, like the other pachinko machines shown in FIG. 44, when a plurality of pachinko machines having the same characteristics as the pachinko machine 10 are installed in the game hall, the pachinko machines satisfying the condition for generating the visual sensation notice. In the machine 10 and the pachinko machine that does not satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice, even if the same time-linked effect is started from the same time T0, the time difference in the time-linked effect element to be executed ( Deviation occurs. As a result, not only the player of the pachinko machine 10 but also the players of the surrounding pachinko machines recognize that the notice of visual feeling has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 that satisfies the condition for generating the visual sensation notice.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-interlocking effect element having the start position at the temporal position TP3, which is a specific temporal position, in each of the game times of the game times P01 to P04, the player is told to the player. It is possible to recognize a strong sense of sight of the portion after the temporal position TP3, which is the specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element. Further, the pachinko machine 10 synchronizes the start timing of the time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times with the start timing of each game time (game time P01 to game time P04), so that a stronger sense of a priori is played. Can be given to anyone.

Further, if it is assumed that the start position of the time-linked effect element that starts at the timing of the start of each game time is set in advance as the processing of the visual advance notice, even once in the time-linked effect element. There is a possibility that a pre-visual feeling notice using a time-linked effect element may be executed from a time position that has not been executed. For example, when it is set that the time-linked effect element is executed from the specific temporal position "TP10" every time triggered by the timing of starting each of the game times of the game times P01 to P04, the game times P01 ~ The time-linked effect element that was executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time P01 of the game times P04 is started is the start of the first game time P01. At the timing of, the time-linked effect element is started and executed from the specific temporal position TP10 that has not been executed even once. Further, the time positions TP3 to TP9 are not executed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed at the timing when the game time P01 is started, which is started after the process of determining that the game time P04 satisfies the condition for occurrence of the visual sensation notice. The time position TP3 of the time-linked effect element that is being stored is stored as a specific time position, and the stored specific time position TP3 is the second time or later of a plurality of executions (game time P02 to game time P04). Since it is the start position of the time-linked effect element, from the second time of the time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times from among the times that are once executed as a continuous series of time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP5). The temporal position TP3 can be set as the start position of the. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that was executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time 01 of the game times P01 to P04 is started is the first time. It is possible to avoid sudden interruption at the timing of the start of the game game P01, and to avoid starting and executing the time-linked effect element from the specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. Further, all the parts of the time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP20) are executed, which enables the player to experience all the parts of the time-related effect elements.

Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-time interlocking effect element a plurality of times in addition to the time interlocking effect element, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can control the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Therefore, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements to be executed multiple times, it is possible to increase or decrease the player's expectation, or to change the player's expectation, such as adding intonation to the expectation. You can In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the non-time-interlocking effect element to be executed multiple times. When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the non-time-interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent execution elements having different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. Moreover, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect elements (the time-interlocking effect element and the non-time-interlocking effect element) having the same content are executed a plurality of times. At the same time, the player can be convinced that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, which has a special meaning.

G. Seventh embodiment:
Although the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments has a configuration in which the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element for pre-visualization notice, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not detect the visual effect. As a performance element for use, a button performance, which is one of the operation acceptance performance elements, may be selected. In the following, a case will be described in which the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual sensation notification, and executes the button effect multiple times.

<Example 1 of notice of a sense of sight using button presentation>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for predicting the visual sense and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1 and XA2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XA.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XA, it executes the effect mode XA1 including the content suggesting that the player press the effect operation button 24 (S2701). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA1 is an effect mode in which the image of the treasure box is displayed and the characters and images for prompting the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

When the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the production mode XA1 (S2702: YES), the production mode XA1 is triggered by the production operation button 24 being pressed. Executes a different effect mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XA2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2702: NO), the production mode XA1 is executed and the production mode XA2 is not executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XA, it executes the effect mode XA1 as in the case of the first button effect XA (S2704 or S2707). When the effect mode XA2 was executed when the first button effect XA was executed, after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2704), the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not. In any case (S2705), effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, when the production operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: YES), the production mode XA2 is executed with the production operation button 24 being pressed as a trigger ( S2706). On the other hand, if the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the production mode XA2 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S2706).

On the other hand, in the case where the effect mode XA2 was not executed when the first button effect was executed, after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2707), the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not. In any of the cases (S2708), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

When the second button effect XA ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

When the button effect XA is executed three times or more, the same control as that when the second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XA is finished. Good.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for pre-visualization notice, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the player's input is performed. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA, while the effect mode X-like A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA. Therefore, even when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XA having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to let the player recognize that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same effect. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XA of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpected effect and the interest of the game can be improved. You can However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the production mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the depression of the production operation button 24 or the lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the notice of the visual feeling and selects the button effect XA a plurality of times when the condition for generating the visual effect notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XA that is the target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. It may be configured to execute XA multiple times.

The pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the form of the effect operation button 24 into a form in which there is a press (that is, a form depressed by the press). Then, the changing unit has pressed the mode of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2705: NO) and when the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706). It may be changed to the mode according to the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to give a surprising effect to the game, and the effect mode XA2 can be achieved even though the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed. It can be compelling to be performed. The changing unit can be realized by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24, for example.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect operation button 24 is, for example, The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the production operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XA processing will be described.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XA is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for predicting a visual sense. In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. For the first-executed flag, the notice effect (button effect XA) for notice of already-visual feeling is already executed once after the notice flag of already-known feeling is stored, that is, after the condition for generating the notice of already-known feeling is satisfied. This is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 whether or not it has been completed.

When it is determined in step S2801 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XA has not been executed even once. Then, the process proceeds to step S2802, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XA1 described above. The effect mode XA1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S2803.

In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S2803 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the production execution means are described above. Rendering mode XA2 is executed. After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2805 to store the button pressing flag in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XA was executed. After executing step S2805, the process advances to step S2807.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the flow advances to step S2806 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed, and step S2804 is executed. Proceeds to S2807.

In step S2807, the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XA is ended.

When it is determined in step S2801 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S2801: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XA has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S2808, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XA1. Then, it progresses to step S2809.

In step S2809, it is determined whether a button depression flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S2809 that the button press flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed when the first button effect XA is executed, In step S2810, the process waits until a predetermined time elapses, and after the predetermined time elapses, the second or subsequent button effect XA is ended without executing the effect mode XA2 (step S2812).

When it is determined in step S2809 that the button press flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed when the first button effect XA is executed, Then, the process proceeds to step S2811, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed in the button effect XA currently executed.

When it is determined in step S2811 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the production mode XA2 for the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as production execution means. After executing, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended.

If it is determined in step S2811 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the flow advances to step S2813 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has passed (S2813: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812, and the symbol display as the effect executing means is performed. After causing the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XA2, the button effect XA for the second time and thereafter is ended.

According to the above process, the button effect XA can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XA may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of visual advance notice using button presentation>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as the effect element for predicting the visual sense and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XB.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XB, it executes the effect mode XB1 including the content suggesting that the player press the effect operation button 24 (S2901). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the production mode XB1 is a production mode in which the image of the treasure box is displayed and the characters and images for prompting the user to press the production operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XB1 may be another mode.

When the production operation button 24 has been pressed within a predetermined time after executing the production mode XB1 (S2902: YES), the production mode XB1 and the production mode XB1 are triggered by the production operation button 24 being pressed. Executes a different effect mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the production mode XB2 is a production mode in which a female character appears in the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XB2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2902: NO), the production mode XB3 different from the production modes XB1 and XB2 is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time (S2907). .. In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB3 is an effect mode in which the fish character carries away the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XB3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the second button effect XB, it executes the effect mode XB1 as in the case of the first button effect XB (S2904 or S2908). When the effect mode XB2 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2904), the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not. In either case (S2905), effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2905: YES), the effect mode XB2 is executed with the effect that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. S2906). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the production mode XB2 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S2906).

On the other hand, when the effect mode XB3 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2908), there was a case where the effect operation button 24 was pressed, and there was no case. In either case (S2909), effect mode XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2909: YES), the production mode XB3 is executed with the production operation button 24 being pressed as a trigger. S2910). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the production mode XB3 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S2910).

When the second button effect XB ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

When the button effect XB is executed three or more times, the same control as when executing the second button effect XB is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XB is finished. Good.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the effect mode XB2 in the first button effect XB when executing the button effect XB a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, an input by the player is performed. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB, while the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player Regardless of this, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to let the player recognize that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same effect. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XB of the content is executed multiple times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB2 is triggered by the production operation button 24 being pressed. Since the effect mode XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect of the predetermined time elapses and the effect mode XB2 or the effect. Aspect XB3 can be performed. Further, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB3 is executed, so that it is possible to give the game a surprise, and the entertainment of the game is increased. It is possible to improve. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without the depression of the production operation button 24 or the elapse of the predetermined time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the occurrence condition of the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and the button effect XB is repeated a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XB that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. It may be configured to execute XB multiple times.

The pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the form of the effect operation button 24 into a form in which there is a press (that is, a form depressed by the press). Then, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2905: NO), and the changing means executes the effect mode XB2 (S2906), the effect operation button 24 mode has been pressed. It may be changed to the mode according to the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to add a surprising effect to the game, and the effect mode XB2 can be achieved even though the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed. It can be compelling to be done. The changing unit can be realized by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24, for example.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the production operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XB processing will be described.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XB is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for predicting a visual sense. In step S3001, it is determined whether the first-execution completion flag is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S3001 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S3001: NO), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XB has not been executed even once. Then, the process proceeds to step S3002, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XB1 described above. The effect mode XB1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S3003 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as production execution means are described above. Rendering mode XB2 is executed. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to store the button pressing flag in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94.

When it is determined in step S3003 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S3006, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3006: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is displayed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XB3 described above. Then, it progresses to step S3008.

In step S3008, the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XB is ended.

When it is determined in step S3001 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S3001: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XB has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S3009, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XB1. Then, it progresses to step S3010.

In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S3010 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the process proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process proceeds to step S3011, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the process returns to step S3010, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3011: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

In step S3012, it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored. When it is determined in step S3012 that the button pressing flag is stored (S3012: YES), the process proceeds to step S3013, and the effect mode XB2 is applied to the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. After the execution, the button effect XB for the second time and thereafter is ended. On the other hand, in step S3012, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, and the effect display means 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are used. After executing XB3, the second and subsequent button effects XB are ended.

According to the above process, the button effect XB can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XB may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of visual notice using button effect>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XC1, XC2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XC.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the button effect XC for the first time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XC1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC1 is an effect mode in which the image of the treasure box is displayed and the characters and images prompting the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XC1 may be another mode.

After the performance mode XC1 is executed, the performance mode XC2 different from the performance mode XC1 is executed regardless of whether the performance operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3102) (S3103). .. Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the effect that the effect operation button 24 is pressed ( S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XC2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the production mode XC2 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S3103).

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XC, it executes the effect mode XC1 as in the case of the first button effect XC (S3104). After the performance mode XC1 is executed, the performance mode XC2 is executed (S3106) regardless of whether the performance operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3105). Specifically, when the production operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: YES), the production mode XC2 is executed with the production operation button 24 being pressed as a trigger ( S3106). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the production mode XC2 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S3106).

When the second button effect XC ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3107). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

When the button effect XC is executed three times or more, the same control as when executing the first and second button effects XC is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is given after the last button effect XC is finished. Just run it.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, whether the button effect XC is executed for the first time or the button effect XC is executed for the second time and thereafter, similarly, after performing the effect mode XC1, the player performs an input operation. The performance mode XC2 is executed regardless of the operation mode of. Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the content of the button effect XC executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to let the player recognize that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same effect. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XC of the content is executed multiple times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since it is executed, the player can be positively involved in the button effect XC, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Further, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpected effect and the interest of the game can be improved. You can However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the production mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the depression of the production operation button 24 or the lapse of a predetermined time.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the first button effect XC, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is forcibly executed. Therefore, a player who knows this mechanism is expected to forcibly execute the effect mode XC2 without pressing the effect operation button 24 when the first button effect XC is executed. Will be done. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the above button effect XA and button effect XB in addition to this button effect XC, in the case where the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes that the button effect being executed this time is not the button effect XC but the possibility of the button effect XA or the button effect XB, and suggests it. It is expected that the effect F will be executed. Therefore, the player can play with a high expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the occurrence condition of the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and performs the button effect XC a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XC that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. The configuration may be such that XC is executed multiple times.

The pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the form of the effect operation button 24 into a form in which there is a press (that is, a form depressed by the press). Then, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3105: NO), and the changing means executes the effect mode XC2 (S3106), the effect operation button 24 mode has been pressed. It may be changed to the mode according to the case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to give a surprising effect to the game, and the effect mode XC2 can be obtained even though the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed. It can be compelling to be performed. The changing unit can be realized by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24, for example.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time or the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the production operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can An example of the button effect XC processing will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XC is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for predicting a sense of already seen. In this button effect XC, the same processing is executed when it is executed for the first time and when it is executed for the second time and thereafter.

In step S3201, the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XC1 described above. The effect mode XC1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S3202 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the design display device 41 as the production execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 described above produce. After executing the mode XC2, the button effect XC is ended.

When it is determined in step S3202 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the process proceeds to step S3203 and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3204, and the effect execution means is used. After causing the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to perform the effect mode XC2, the button effect XC is ended.

According to the above process, the button effect XC can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XC process may be implemented by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of a visual sense notice using a button presentation>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XD.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the first button effect XD, it first includes a content that suggests to the player to press the effect operation button 24, and selects one of a plurality of options. The effect selection screen XD1 for allowing the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen in which the selection state is switched each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect selection screen XD1, a female character appears in the center of the screen, and a plurality of turtle characters carrying shells appear in front of the female character, and the operation button 24 is pressed. Each time the turtle character moves to the left (S3302), a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In this embodiment, since the respective turtle characters have the same design, the aspect of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have a mode other than that shown in FIG. 55, and may have a different mode before and after the effect operation button is pressed.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3303). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect mode XD2, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the shell that is carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the shell This is a production mode in which pearls having predetermined characteristics appear from the inside. In the present embodiment, the respective turtle characters have the same pattern, but the characteristics of the objects such as pearls appearing in the shell differ from turtle character to turtle character.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XD, the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD is displayed (S3304). Then, each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the same effect mode XD2 as the option selected for the first time is selected. Rendering mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the shell carried by the selected turtle character is opened, and the first time from the shell A performance mode XD2 in which pearls having the same characteristics appear is executed.

When the second button effect XD ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3307). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

When the button effect XD is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XD is finished. Good.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for pre-visualization notice, the button effect XD executed after the second time regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. In, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first button effect XD is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the content of the button effect XD executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to let the player recognize that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XD of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect selection screen XD1 has the same aspect before and after the selection state is switched, when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the same aspect effect is produced. The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the feeling of being seen by the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XD as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the condition for generating the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and the button effect XD is generated a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XD that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. The configuration may be such that XD is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 such as the pressed time and the number of times is satisfied with a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-described example, the production operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XD processing will be described.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XD is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for predicting a visual sense. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S3401 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XD has not been executed even once. The process goes to step S3402 to display the effect selection screen XD1 described above on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3403 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the flow advances to step S3404 to display the production selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched on the symbol display device 41. In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect selection screen XD1, a mode in which the turtle character moves to the left and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen is displayed. Then, it progresses to step S3405 and it is determined whether predetermined time passed.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the process returns to step S3403, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3405: YES), the flow advances to step S3406 to display the selected effect mode XD2 in the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means. Let it run. Then, it progresses to step S3407.

In step S3407, the type information of the effect mode XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. After that, proceeding to step S3408, after storing the first-execution completed flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, the first button effect XD is ended.

When it is determined in step S3401 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S3401: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XD has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S3409 to display the same effect selection screen XD1 as the first time on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. Then, it progresses to step S3410.

In step S3410, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3410 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the flow advances to step S3411 to display the production selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3412, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, the effect mode XD2 stored in step S3407, the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and After causing the various lamps 47 to execute, the button effect XD for the second time and thereafter is ended.

According to the above process, the button effect XD can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XD process may be implemented by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of notice of visual sense using button presentation>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as the effect element for pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XE.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the first button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 includes a content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player and one effect from a plurality of effect modes. The effect selection screen XE1 for allowing the player to select the mode is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selection state of the effect mode is switched over time. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette type selection screen in which the selection cursor moves with the passage of time and one effect mode is selected from the four effect modes. In the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot select it by aiming for a particular effect mode. Note that the effect selection screen XE1 may be in another mode.

Then, regardless of whether the production operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3502), one production mode is selected from the plurality of production modes, and the selection is performed. The performance mode XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3502: YES), the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and among the plurality of effect modes. One effect mode is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time period (S3502: NO), one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes, triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time period. Then, the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected effect mode XE2 is a cut-in notice effect in which the turtle character is the protagonist. However, another effect mode may be selected as the effect mode, and each effect mode that may be selected may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XE, it displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the effect selection screen XE1 displayed the first time (S3504). Then, regardless of whether the production operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3505), the same production mode as the production mode selected for the first time is selected and The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3505: YES), the effect selected for the first time is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. The same effect mode as the mode is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed. On the other hand, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same effect mode as the effect mode selected the first time is selected when the predetermined time has elapsed. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

When the second button effect XE ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3507). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

When the button effect XE is executed three times or more, the same control as that when the second button effect XE is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XE. Good.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, the button effect XE executed after the second time regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. In, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, the player can be made aware that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same effect. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XE of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the condition for generating the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and performs the button effect XE a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot select it by aiming for a particular effect mode. Therefore, the same production mode as the production mode selected for the first time is forcibly selected, even though the player aims at the selection cursor to stop in a production mode different from the production mode selected for the first time. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling of being played.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XE that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. It may be configured to execute XE multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the production operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XE processing will be described.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the button effect XE is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for predicting a visual sense. In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the first-execution completed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S3601 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process proceeds to step S3602, and the roulette type effect selection screen XE1 described above is displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the speaker is also displayed. 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. The effect selection screen XE1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S3603 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the production operation button 24 is pressed, and one production is performed. An image showing that the mode is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Then, it progresses to step S3606.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the flow advances to step S3604 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed.

In step S3604, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and an image showing that one effect mode has been selected Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Then, it progresses to step S3606.

In step S3606, the effect form XE2 selected in step S3605 is executed by the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. Then, it progresses to step S3607.

In step S3607, the type of effect mode XE2 executed in step S3606 is stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Then, it progresses to step S3608.

In step S3608, the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XE is ended.

When it is determined in step S3601 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S3601: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XE has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S3609 to display the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time on the symbol display device 41, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. Then, it progresses to step S3610.

In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3612, and the timing after the effect operation button 24 is pressed is stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the selected effect mode XE2 is selected, and an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3613.

When it is determined in step S3610 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the process proceeds to step S3611, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the process returns to step S3610 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3611: YES), the flow advances to step S3612 to select the effect mode XE2 stored in step S3607 at a timing after the predetermined time has elapsed. The selection cursor is stopped at a timing, and an image showing that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3613.

In step S3613, the effect XE2 selected in step S3612 is executed by the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47, and then the second and subsequent button effects XE are ended.

According to the above process, the button effect XE can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. Note that the processing described above is an example, and the button effect XE processing may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of notice of visual sense using button presentation>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as the effect element for predicting the visual sense and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XF1, XF2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XF.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the button effect XF for the first time, the content that suggests the player to repeatedly hit the effect operation button 24 and the predetermined parameters are in a fixed direction with the passage of time. The effect mode XF1 including the changed contents is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF1 includes the content that the player-side crab character is attacked by the enemy side octopus character with black ink and tries to endure the black ink attack. Is a rendering mode in which the parameter indicating the physical strength of the character changes in the direction of decreasing under the attack of black ink. Further, in the effect mode XF1, as an example of a message that suggests to the player to repeatedly press the effect operation button 24, a character such as “Hold and hit endlessly!” is displayed. However, the presentation mode XF1 may be another mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the performance mode XF1 is executed, the parameter decreases with the passage of time (S3702). At this time, if the player operates the production operation button 24 repeatedly, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to reduce the parameter decreasing speed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes control so that the parameter decreasing speed decreases as the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed per unit time increases. In this way, the player tries to reduce the speed of decrease of the parameter, so that the player repeatedly hits the effect operation buttons 24 so that the number of effect operation buttons 24 pressed per unit time increases. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player tries to make the crab character endure the attack of the octopus by reducing the parameter reduction speed by repeatedly hitting the production operation button 24. Therefore, the player can be positively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XF2 after the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter conditions (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter has decreased to 0, the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect mode XF2 is an effect mode including a content in which the player-side crab character loses the attack of the enemy-side octopus character and cannot be endured. However, the presentation mode XF2 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XF, it executes the same control as in the case of the first button effect XF. Specifically, the effect mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased over time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, the effect mode XF1 and the effect mode XF2 are executed.

When the second button effect XF ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3709). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect.

In the case where the button effect XF is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XF is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XF is finished. Good.

As described above, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) when the button effect is executed a plurality of times. May be done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of executing the button effect XF for the first time as well as in the case of executing the button effect XF for the second time and thereafter, similarly, after executing the effect mode XF1, the player performs an input operation. The parameter is decreased to 0 regardless of the operation mode, and the effect mode XF2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF executed for the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XF having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, the player can be made aware that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same effect. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XF of the content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. In particular, when a production mode that is unfavorable to the player (for example, a production mode in which the character on the player side is defeated) is executed as the production mode XF2, a suggestion production is executed from the depressed feeling, and the player The expectations of can be increased at a stretch. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XF that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual perception notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. It may be configured to execute XF multiple times.

The pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the parameter when executing the first button effect XF, and the process of changing the stored parameter when executing the second or subsequent button effect XF. May be reproduced. By doing so, the process of changing the parameter is the same in each of the button effects XF executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of being seen.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the form of the effect operation button 24 to a form in the case where there is a press (that is, a form that is depressed by the press). Then, the pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the form of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player when executing the first button effect XF, and the second and subsequent times. When executing the button effect XF, it is preferable that the changing means reproduce the process of changing the mode of the stored effect operation button 24. By doing so, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to give the game an unexpected effect. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent button effects XF, the process of changing the aspect of the effect operation button 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that a stronger sense of sight can be given to the player.

Further, in the above example, an example in which the parameter is changed in the direction of decreasing with the passage of time has been described, but the parameter may be changed in the direction of increasing with the passage of time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may execute control so that the increasing speed of the parameter increases as the number of presses of the effect operation buttons 24 per unit time increases. Examples of the parameter that increases with the passage of time include the attack power parameter of the character on the player side, the power parameter, and the like. Then, after the parameter increases and reaches a predetermined value such as the maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a win effect may be executed. By doing so, as in the above example, the parameter increases to a predetermined maximum value regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player, so the pachinko machine 10 performs the button effect XF. It can be executed multiple times with the same content. In addition, the player tries to increase the increasing speed of the parameter so as to continuously hit the effect operation buttons 24 so that the number of presses of the effect operation buttons 24 per unit time increases. Therefore, as in the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

Further, in the above example, the parameter is in the form of a rod, but the parameter is not limited to this, and may be in the form of another shape such as a circle. It may be a modified mode.

Further, in the above-described example, the production operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XF processing will be described.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XF is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for predicting a visual sense. In this button effect XF, the same processing is executed when it is executed for the first time and when it is executed for the second time and thereafter.

In step S3801, the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XF1 described above. The presentation mode XF1 includes content that suggests the player to repeatedly hit the production operation button 24, and content that the physical strength parameter changes in the direction of decreasing with the passage of time. After executing step S3801, the flow proceeds to step S3802.

In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. Specifically, for example, the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time is counted, and when the number of presses is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit. If it is determined in step S3802 that the production operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit (S3802: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3803 and the physical strength parameter is reduced at a predetermined speed. Then, it progresses to step S3805.

If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 has not been repeatedly hit (S3802: NO), the flow proceeds to step S3804 and the physical strength parameter is reduced at a speed faster than the predetermined speed in step S3803. Then, it progresses to step S3805.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the physical strength parameter has become zero. When it is determined in step S3805 that the physical fitness parameter is not 0 (S3805: NO), the process returns to step S3802 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. That is, the presence/absence of continuous hitting of the production operation button 24 is monitored until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, and the physical strength parameter is lowered at a slow speed during the continuous hitting of the production operation button 24, and the effect operation button 24 is not repeatedly hit. During the period, the physical strength parameter is reduced at a high speed.

If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3806, and the above-described effect mode XF2 is applied to the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. Let it run. After that, the notice effect for the notice of the visual sense of the first time or the second time and thereafter is ended.

In the above example, the speed at which the physical strength value is reduced is described as two stages depending on the presence or absence of repeated hits, but may be three stages or more depending on the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time. Good.

According to the above processing, the button effect XF can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. Note that the processing described above is an example, and the button effect XF processing may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of notice of visual sense using button presentation>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as the effect element for predicting the visual feeling and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XG.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XG1 including the content suggesting that the player press the effect operation button 24 (S3901). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG1 is an effect mode in which the image of the treasure box is displayed and the characters and the image prompting the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

When the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the production mode XG1 (S3902: YES), the production mode XG1 is displayed when the production operation button 24 is pressed. Executes a different effect mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XG2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S3902: NO), the production mode XG2 is not executed while the production mode XG1 is being executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the second button effect XG, the effect mode XG1 is executed as in the case of the first button effect XG (S3904 or S3908). Then, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the effect mode XG1 (S3905: YES or S3909: YES), it is triggered that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. As the effect mode XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is being executed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example), or in the button effect XG executed in a plurality of times. When XG2 has not been executed even once, a suggestive effect F that indicates to the player that the button effect XG has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect. On the other hand, when the same effect is not executed even once in the button effect XG that is executed a plurality of times, specifically, the second effect is executed despite the effect mode XG2 being executed in the first button effect XG. When the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG, and when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG, the effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG. In the case of, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect or the like is executed.

When the button effect XG is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XG is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XG is finished. It may be determined whether or not.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effects XG with the same content are executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XG having the content of is executed multiple times. Furthermore, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XG with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition to the above, it is possible to convince the player that the button effect XG having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive effect F after the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestive effect F will be executed, and each time the button effect XG is executed, By performing the same input operation, the effect operation button 24 is operated so that the button effect XG is executed with the same content, and it is expected that the suggestive effect F is generated. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the button effects XG that are sequentially executed can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XG2 is triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XG, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the production mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without using the production operation button 24 as a trigger.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the condition for generating the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and the button effect XG is repeated a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XG that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual sensation notice is subject to the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. The configuration may be such that XG is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, such as the pressed time and the number of times, satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-described example, the production operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XG processing will be described.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XG is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for notifying the user of the visual sense. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94.

When it is determined in step S4001 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XG has not been executed even once. Then, the process proceeds to step S4002, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XG1 described above. The effect mode XG1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S4003.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S4003 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as production execution means are described above. Rendering mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process advances to step S4005 to store the button pressing flag in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XG was executed. After executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4007.

When it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the process proceeds to step S4006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the process returns to step S4003 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S4004 and step S4005 are not executed, and step It advances to S4007.

In step S4007, the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4008, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XG is ended.

The suggestion effect execution flag is that when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the already-visited notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effect XG. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XG.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, in the suggestion effect execution flag, in the case where the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG after the already-visited notice flag is stored, It is deleted when the effect mode XG2 is not executed even once in the button effect XG. Further, as for the suggestion effect execution flag, when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG after the already-appearing notice flag is stored, the effect mode is effected even once in the second and subsequent button effects XG. It is deleted when XG2 is executed. That is, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the already-explained notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effect XG, or the plurality of button effects XG are executed. If the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the button effects XG, the suggested effect execution flag is not erased but remains stored. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the notice effect of the game time related to the hold information determined to have satisfied the condition of occurrence of the notice of the visual sense, it is determined whether or not this suggestive effect execution flag is stored. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, it returns to the description of the processing of each step in FIG.

When it is determined in step S4001 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S4001: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XG has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S4009, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XG1. Then, it progresses to step S4010.

In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S4010 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the effect display XG2 for the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means. To run. After that, the process advances to step S4012, and it is determined whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94.

If it is determined in step S4012 that the button depression flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

In step S4015, if the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased, and the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the button effect XG for the second time and thereafter is ended.

When it is determined in step S4010 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process proceeds to step S4013, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. When it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4013: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

In step S4014, it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4014 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

According to the above process, the suggestive effect F can be executed only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The processing described above is an example, and the button effect XG processing may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of notice of a sense of sight using button presentation>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the visual advance notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XH.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the button effect XH for the first time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XH1 including contents suggesting that the player press the effect operation button 24 (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the production mode XH1 is a production mode in which the image of the treasure box is displayed, and at the same time, the characters and images prompting the user to press the production operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XH1 may be another mode.

When the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after executing the production mode XH1 (S4102: YES), the production mode XH1 is displayed when the production operation button 24 is pressed. Executes a different effect mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears in the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XH2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the production mode XH3 different from the production modes XH1 and XH2 is executed upon the elapse of the predetermined time (S4109). .. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH3 is an effect mode in which the fish character carries away the treasure box. However, the presentation mode XH3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the second button effect XH, the effect mode XH1 is executed as in the case of the first button effect XH (S4104 or S4110). Then, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time after executing the effect mode XH1 (S4105: YES or S4111: YES), the effect operation button 24 is pressed. As the effect mode XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the production mode XH3 is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time (S4107).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH that are executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example), or in the button effects XH that are executed a plurality of times. When XH3 is executed, a suggestion effect F that indicates to the player that the button effect XH has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S4108 or S4114). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab!?” to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the above-described battle effect. On the other hand, when the same effect is not executed even once in the button effect XH that has been executed a plurality of times, specifically, the second effect is performed despite the effect mode XH2 being executed in the first button effect XH. When the effect mode XH3 is executed in the button effect XH, and when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH even though the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH For example, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect or the like is executed.

When the button effect XH is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XH is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XH is finished. It may be determined whether or not.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effects XH are executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same. It is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the button effect XH having the content of is executed multiple times. Furthermore, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XH with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition, it is possible to convince the player that the button effect XH having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestive effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, expecting that the suggestive effect F is executed, each time the button effect XH is executed, By performing the same input operation, the effect operation button 24 is operated so that the button effect XH is executed with the same content, and the generation of the suggestive effect F is expected. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention of the player to the button effects XH that are sequentially executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the production mode XH2 is triggered by the production operation button 24 being pressed. Since it is executed, the player can be positively involved in the button effect XH, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the production mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the depression of the production operation button 24.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling when the condition for generating the notice of the existing feeling is satisfied, and the button effect XH is repeated a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the pressing of the effect operation button 24 is acceptable is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effect with the same content. Even if is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the button effect executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for pre-visualizing the visual feeling, it is difficult for the player to feel the visual effect. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence condition of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, when the button effect is selected as the effect element for the visual sensation advance notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display the parameters.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of visual sensation is satisfied before the pending information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the notice of visual sensation is generated. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XH that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the pending information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the notice of visual acuity is targeted for the jackpot lottery. Start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the existing feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity is satisfied, when the holding information is targeted for the jackpot lottery, and the button effect in one game time related to the holding information. The configuration may be such that XH is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect operation button 24 is The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 such as the pressed time and the number of times satisfies a predetermined operation condition. ..

Further, in the above-described example, the production operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player back and forth or left and right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. should be adopted. You can Hereinafter, an example of the button effect XH processing will be described.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the button effect XH is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for predicting a visual sense. In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94.

When it is determined in step S4201 that the first-execution completed flag is not stored (S4201: NO), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XH has not been executed even once. Then, the process proceeds to step S4202, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XH1. The effect mode XH1 includes contents that suggest the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, it progresses to step S4203.

In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S4203 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the production execution means are described above. Rendering mode XH2 is executed. After executing step S4204, the process advances to step S4205 to store the button press flag in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XH was executed. After executing step S4205, the process advances to step S4207.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the flow advances to step S4206 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the process returns to step S4203 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4206, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207, and symbol display as an effect execution means. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XH3 described above. Then, it progresses to step S4208.

In step S4208, the first-execution completed flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4209, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XH is ended.

The suggestion effect execution flag is that, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the already-visited notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effect XH of the plurality of times. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, in the suggestion effect execution flag, when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH after the already-visited notice flag is stored, It is deleted when the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH. Further, as for the suggestion effect execution flag, when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH after the already-excited feeling notice flag is stored, the effect mode XH2 is performed even once in the second and subsequent button effects XH. Is deleted when is executed. That is, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the already-appearing notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH, or the plurality of button effects XH are executed. When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all the button effects XH, the suggested effect execution flag is not erased but remains stored. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the notice effect of the game time related to the hold information determined to have satisfied the condition of occurrence of the notice of the visual sense, it is determined whether or not this suggestive effect execution flag is stored. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the description of the processing of each step in FIG. 68 will be resumed.

When it is determined in step S4201 that the first-execution completed flag is stored (S4201: YES), that is, when the visual effect notice flag is stored and the button effect XH has already been executed at least once. Advances to step S4210 and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XH1. Then, it progresses to step S4211.

In step S4211, it is determined whether the production operation button 24 has been pressed. When it is determined in step S4211 that the production operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212, and the production mode XH2 is applied to the symbol display device 41 as the production execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. To run. After that, the process advances to step S4213, and it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94.

When it is determined in step S4213 that the button press flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggested effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the flow advances to step S4217.

In step S4217, if the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased and the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended. When the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the button effect XH for the second time and thereafter is ended as it is.

If it is determined in step S4211 that the production operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the flow advances to step S4214 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the process returns to step S4211 and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, it is monitored whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4214, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and symbol display as effect executing means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XH3. Then, it progresses to step S4216.

In step S4216, it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4216 that the button press flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4216 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

According to the above process, the suggestive effect F can be executed only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XH process may be implemented by another algorithm.

According to the present embodiment described above, various expectations can be given to the player. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which at least two or more of the above button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH can be selected as effect elements for pre-visualization notice, the player can While paying attention to the effect mode executed in the effect, various predictions are made regarding what kind of button effect is being executed, and the generation of the suggested effect is expected. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between the present embodiment and the first to seventh embodiments is that a second starting opening unit 200 including a second starting opening inside is provided in the right area of the game area GA, and 2 The point is that the high-frequency support modes of various types are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting opening unit 200 and the control relating to the second starting opening unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configurations and processes as those in the first to seventh embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second starting opening unit 200 including the second starting opening inside is provided in the right area of the game area GA. In the present embodiment, all the game balls that have been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a launch strength of a predetermined value or more are configured to enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second starting opening unit 200. The second starting opening unit 200 has an opening 202 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 202, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 202, It is provided with an alternate distribution mechanism 204 that alternately distributes the game balls that enter the opening 202 to the left route R1 and the right route R2. A through gate 206 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the route R1, and an opening/closing ball entrance device 208 is provided downstream of the through gate 206 and the route R2.

The alternate distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute a game ball that has entered the opening 202 to the route R1, and a game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the route R1 to the route R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 includes a center piece 204a formed in the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left side of the center piece 204a, and a right side formed on the right side of the center piece 204a. It is provided with a piece portion 204c and a rotary shaft 204d provided between the left side piece portion 204b and the right side piece portion 204c. The area sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the left piece 204b functions as a left holding portion 204e that temporarily holds the game ball. The region sandwiched by the central piece 204a and the right piece 204c functions as a right holding portion 204f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the alternative distribution mechanism 204 when the game ball reaches the alternative distribution mechanism 204 will be described later.

The opening and closing ball entrance device 208 includes an opening and closing door 208b as an electric accessory that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting opening 208a into which a game ball can enter is inside the opening and closing door 208b. I have it. Further, inside the opening/closing door 208b, a guide path 208c inclined toward the second starting port 208a is provided, and the game ball entering the inside of the opening/closing door 208b is second along the guide path 208c. It is guided to the starting port 208a. The second starting port 208a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening/closing door 208b is closed, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 208a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 208a. That is, the opening/closing door 208b has a function of transitioning the state of the second starting port 208a between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state. In addition, in the normal state, the opening/closing door 208b is in a closed state, and the second starting port 208a is in a ball entry disabled state.

The through gate 206 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through-gate 206, the main control device 60 uses the passage of the game ball through the through-gate 206 as an opportunity to make an internal lottery (electric role) of whether or not the above-described opening/closing door 208b is transited to the open state. Opening lottery). As a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, if the player opens the opening/closing door 208b, the main control device 60 displays the result of the electric accessory opening lottery on the universal figure unit 38 and closes the opening/closing door 208b. Transition from the state to the open state.

The route R1 is configured such that the sorted game balls can pass through the through gate 206, and the sorted game balls are in the open/close doors 208b of the opening/closing entrance device 208. In this case, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second starting opening 208a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the route R1x branched from the route R1 is provided, but the game ball distributed to the route R1 is configured to always pass through the through gate 206. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls assigned to the route R1 may pass the route R1x without passing through the through gate 206.

The route R2 is configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the through gate 206, and the sorted game balls are in the open/close door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. In some cases, it is possible to enter the second starting opening 208a.

In the present embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 206, the general-purpose unit 38 displays the result of the electric accessory release lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 206. Until (that is, the variable time from the start of the variable display of the general-purpose picture unit 38 to the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory release lottery), the game ball is a through gate. It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 after passing through 206. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, the universal figure unit 38. The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38 until the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening/closing door 208b is closed immediately after the variation of the universal figure unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric figure opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will start.

Strictly speaking, however, there is a time required for control from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal graphic unit 38 until the opening and closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. .. In the present embodiment, the time required for control from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38 until the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entrance device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. Is about 0.004 seconds. As for the reason why it is about 0.004 seconds, the main control device 60, as described above, performs 0.004 seconds for the electric power combination support processing (FIG. 12: S407, FIG. 76 described later) in the normal processing (FIG. 12). In the case of winning the electric accessory release lottery and displaying the winning result in the universal figure unit 38 (FIG. 76: S4520), the cycle is repeated 0.004 seconds in the next cycle. This is because the opening/closing door 208b opening process (FIG. 77: S4698) is executed in the power combination opening/closing process (FIG. 76: S4522, FIG. 77 described later) of the power combination support process (FIG. 76). That is, in the present embodiment, even if the time required for control is taken into consideration in addition to the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b, the opening/closing of the opening/closing after the game ball passes through the through gate 206. The time until the opening/closing door 208b of the ball device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state is from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. It is shorter than the time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 and wins in the electric accessory open lottery, the main controller 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory open lottery. The opening/closing door 208b is transitioned from the closed state to the open state before the timing of reaching the ball device 208. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the opening/closing door 208b when the electric prize opening lottery is won. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode as types of high frequency support modes for controlling the opening/closing door 208b. In the first high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened once in the electric accessory opening lottery is 1 and the opening time is 0. It is set to 5 seconds. In the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened when the electric accessory opening lottery is won is one and the opening time is one. It is set to 1 second. That is, the difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is the time length for which the open/close door 208b maintains the open state after the transition from the closed state to the open state. The number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is different in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by 81.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the first high frequency support mode is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and has a constant launching intensity of 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and becomes the state A2. ..

As shown in the state A2, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding part 204e falls from the left holding part 204e and is distributed to the left route R1. .. After that, the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory opening lottery in the first high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the opening/closing entrance device 208 is opened. The opening/closing door 208b is set to be opened once and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 displaying the lottery result of the electric accessory release lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is not provided, and the opening/closing entrance device 208 of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 is displayed after the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed on the universal figure unit 38. The time required for the control until the opening/closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state is about 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 transits to the open state about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, the through gate 206 is set. At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state becomes A3.

As shown in the state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, and thus alternate. The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and becomes the state A4.

As shown in state A4, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held in the right holding part 204f falls from the right holding part 204f and is distributed to the right route R2. .. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, so after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the game ball GB2 is opened/closed. The interval until reaching the ball entrance device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 208b has already transitioned to the closed state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball device 208, the game ball GB2 is opened/closed ball. It is not possible to enter the ball into the second starting opening 208a provided inside the device 208. After that, the state becomes the state A1 again, and the state A1 to the state A4 are repeated.

That is, in the first high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals at a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. In the situation where the game ball GB1 which has been distributed to the route R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state and is distributed to the route R2. At the timing when the game ball GB2 thus reached reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is transitioned to the closed state.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the second high frequency support mode is executed. The state A1 to state A3 in FIG. 72 is the same as the state A1 to state A3 in FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high-frequency support mode, since the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, as shown in the state A4 of FIG. 72, next to the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1. At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening and closing ball entrance device 208, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entrance device 208 is maintained in an open state, and the gaming ball GB2 is the second starting opening provided inside the opening and closing door 208b. It will enter the ball 208a.

That is, in the second high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously emitted at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. In the situation where the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening and closing ball entrance device 208, the opening and closing door 208b is transited to the open state and the second The opening/closing door 208b maintains the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 assigned to the path reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. For reference, this FIG. 73 also shows the type and contents of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open/close execution mode. As described above, in this embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as the types of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the open/close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33 is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 9, 8R Normally, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the first high-frequency support mode is entered. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot is performed, and also to the first high-frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is performed, and the switching to the second high frequency support mode is performed after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the switching to the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is performed, and also to the second high frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R Normally, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the first high-frequency support mode is entered. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and also shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the process shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R certainty variation jackpot and to the second high-frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the switching to the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is performed, and after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the transition to the second high frequency support mode is performed.

Here, the game balls are fired in a situation in which the game ball firing mechanism 81 has continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball-out rate, and the ball-out rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is executed is output. It is defined as the sphere rate Mi. In the following, the ball exit rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ball exit rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. Then, as described above, one of the two game balls that has been fired enters the second starting opening 208a of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the exit rate M1 in the case where the first high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1=1/2=0.50

Here, the rate of exit is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200, and the game ball continues at 0.6 second intervals. It means that the player's hand-held game balls are reduced in the situation that the player has been fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high frequency support mode, two game balls are fired within 1.2 seconds and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, so that the game ball that the player has is , Every 1.2 seconds, it will decrease at a rate of one.

In the second high-frequency support mode, the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. Then, as described above, two of the two game balls that have been fired enter the second starting opening 208a of the opening and closing ball entrance device 208, and the two game balls are paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the exit rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2=2/2=1.00

Here, the rate of ball launch is 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200, continuously at 0.6 second intervals. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the situation where the player has been launched. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired within 1.2 seconds and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the game balls that the player has are It will not increase or decrease.

Further, the proportion of the i-th high-frequency support mode executed when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is defined as PAi. Then, the proportion PA1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the proportion PA2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1=the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0-19) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33 and shift to the first high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=20/30
PA2=number of jackpot type counter C2 values (20 to 29) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting opening 33 and shift to the second high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=10/30

Further, the total outgoing rate in the case where the high hit support is executed by winning the big hit lottery based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is defined as the first total outgoing rate T1. , The first total rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

In the above formula (1), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and n=2 in this embodiment. Therefore, the first total ball launch rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2
= 0.50 x (20/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) = 0.67

That is, the first total ball-out rate T1 is the sum of the ball-out rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the sphere rate.

Further, the proportion of the i-th high-frequency support mode executed when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is defined as PBi. To do. Then, the ratio PB1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PB2 in which the second high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.
PB1=the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0-11) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 208a and shift to the first high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=12/30
PB2=number of jackpot type counters C2 (12 to 29) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 208a and shift to the second high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=18/30

In addition, when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 208a is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total outgoing rate is defined as the second total outgoing rate T2. , The second total outflow rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

In the above equation (2), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and n=2 in this embodiment. Therefore, the second total ball-out rate T2 in this embodiment is as follows.

T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2
= 0.50 x (12/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) = 0.80

That is, the second total ball-out rate T2 is the sum of the ball-out rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the sphere rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball-out rate T1 and the value of the second total ball-out rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the winning opening process for the starting opening executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

In step S4306, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. The processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the second high frequency support flag in step S4404. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the second high frequency support mode. The second high frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is being executed.

Further, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the first high-frequency support flag in step S4407. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the first high-frequency support mode. The processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. The first high-frequency support flag is used to determine whether the first high-frequency support mode is being executed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a power combination support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 20) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs the electric accessory release lottery in step S4509. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessory release counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 249, the electric accessory release lottery is won. .. At the same time as the electric accessory release lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2.

Further, in step S4511, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the support winning flag and sets “1” in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. To do. This means that the number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened when the electric accessory opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment is one. The process in each of the other steps is the same as the process (FIG. 20) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 21) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that different open times are set for each of the two types of high frequency support modes. The details will be described below.

In step S4601, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory is open. Whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the opening/closing door 208b is opened (S4601: YES), the process proceeds to step S4602.

In step S4602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening/closing door 208b. When it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4602: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the opening/closing door 208b has not ended, the main power combination opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4602: YES), the process proceeds to step S4603, and a closing process for controlling the open/close door 208b to the closed state is performed. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the opening/closing door 208b is “0”, the opening/closing door 208b is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is opened/closed this time. "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of. After executing step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S4605 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4605: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4605: YES), the process proceeds to step S4606 and the in-support flag is erased. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the opening/closing door 208b is not open (S4601: NO), the process advances to step S4607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the opening/closing door 208b. When it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4607: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4607: YES), the flow advances to step S4608 to execute an opening process for controlling the open/close door 208b to the open state. Then, it progresses to step S4609.

In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (S4609: NO), the flow advances to step S4610 to determine whether or not the first high frequency support mode. Determine whether.

If it is determined in step S4610 that the first high frequency support mode is in progress (S4610: YES), the flow advances to step S4611 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that the first high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4610: NO), the flow advances to step S4612 to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is being performed (S4612: YES), the flow advances to step S4613 to set "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4609 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (S4609: YES), or if it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4612: NO), then control proceeds to step S4614. Then, the process proceeds to set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1 can pass through the through gate 206 and is the second when the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state. It is possible to enter the starting opening 208a. On the other hand, since the game ball GB2 that has arrived after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2, it is impossible to pass through the through gate 206 and the opening door 208b is in the open state, the second starting opening 208a. It becomes possible to enter. That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206, and each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the number of game balls passing through the through gate 206 is set to one and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is set. It can be changed depending on the state of the opening/closing door 208b.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the electric auditors opening lottery. The opening/closing door 208b is controlled. Since the game ball GB2 that arrives after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 causes the opening/closing door 208b of the two opening/closing doors 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Whether the state is a closed state or an open state, that is, whether each of the game balls GB1 and GB2 is inserted into the second starting opening 208a is triggered by the fact that the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206. It is determined according to the result of the electric accessory release lottery executed as and the type of the support mode. Therefore, a series of controls for controlling whether or not each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 is inserted into the second starting opening 208a is triggered by the passage of one game ball GB1 through the through gate 206. Can be achieved with.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from the start of the variable display of the light emitting display unit of the universal figure unit 38 to the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric lottery opening lottery is the electric part. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the open lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Therefore, the universal figure unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the gaming ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Here, since the main control device 60 starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38, the game that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing when the ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the light emitting display unit of the universal drawing unit 38 starts the variable display, the stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed, and the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing entrance device 208 is displayed. The time until the transition to the open state is started is the opening and closing ball entrance device for the game ball GB1 after the first game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory release lottery passes through the through gate 206. It is set to a time shorter than the time to reach 208. Therefore, the main control device 60 can realize the high frequency support mode in which the opening/closing door 208b is opened at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 changes the time length for maintaining the open state after the opening/closing door 208b transits from the closed state to the open state for each type of high-frequency support mode. Since it is controlled, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 can be made different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1 enters the second starting opening 208a, and the game ball GB2 that arrives after the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a. A first high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M1=0.50) and a second high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M2=1.00) in which both game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a. ) And are realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different exit rates, so that intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. The difference between this embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the second starting opening unit is different and that three types of high frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting opening unit 300 and the control relating to the second starting opening unit 300 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configurations and processes as those of the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second starting opening unit 300 included in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. The second starting opening unit 300 has an opening 302 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 302, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 302, It is provided with a first alternate distribution mechanism 304 that alternately distributes the game balls that have entered the opening 302 to the left route R1 and the right route R2. The second starting opening unit 300 further includes a second alternate distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the route R1, a route R11 provided on the left side of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternate distribution. The route R12 is provided on the right side downstream of the minute mechanism 305. A through gate 306 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the route R11, and an opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is provided downstream of the through gate 306, the route R12 and the route R2.

The first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls that have entered the opening 302 to the left route R1 and the right route R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 304 includes a central piece 304a formed in the center, a left piece 304b formed on the left side of the central piece 304a, and a right side formed on the right side of the central piece 304a. It is provided with a piece 304c and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left side piece 304b and the right side piece 304c. The area sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the left piece 304b functions as a left holding portion 304e that temporarily holds the game ball. The region sandwiched by the central piece 304a and the right piece 304c functions as a right holding portion 304f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternative distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls assigned to the route R1 to the left route R11 and the right route R12. Specifically, the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is formed at the center piece 305a formed in the center, the left piece 305b formed on the left side of the center piece 305a, and the right side of the center piece 305a. And a rotary shaft 305d provided between the left side piece 305b and the right side piece 305c. The area sandwiched by the central piece 305a and the left piece 305b functions as a left holding portion 305e that temporarily holds the game ball. The area sandwiched by the central piece 305a and the right piece 305c functions as a right holding portion 305f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The opening and closing ball entrance device 308 includes an opening and closing door 308b that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting opening 308a into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening and closing door 308b. Further, inside the opening/closing door 308b, a guide path 308c inclined toward the second starting port 308a is provided, and the game ball entering the inside of the opening/closing door 308b is second along the guide path 308c. It is guided to the starting port 308a. The second starting port 308a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening/closing door 308b is in the closed state, it is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 308a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 308b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, the opening/closing door 308b has a function of transitioning the state of the second starting opening 308a between the entry-disabled state and the entry-enabled state. In addition, in the normal state, the opening/closing door 308b is in a closed state, and the second starting opening 308a is in a ball entry disabled state.

The through gate 306 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the main control device 60 uses the passage of the game ball through the through gate 306 as an opportunity to make an internal lottery (electric role) whether or not the above-described opening/closing door 308b is transited to the open state. Opening lottery). As a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, if the opening/closing door 308b is won, the main controller 60 displays the result of the electric accessory opening lottery on the universal figure unit 38 and closes the opening/closing door 308b. Transition from the state to the open state.

The route R11 is configured such that the sorted game balls can pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted game balls are in the open/close door 308b of the opening/closing entrance device 308. In this case, it is configured so that it can enter the second starting opening 308a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the route R11x branched from the route R11 is provided, but the game ball distributed to the route R11 is configured to always pass through the through gate 306. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls assigned to the route R11 may pass the route R11x without passing through the through gate 306.

The route R2 and the route R12 are configured such that the assigned game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the assigned game balls are the opening/closing doors 308b of the opening/closing entrance device 308. In the open state, it is possible to enter the second starting port 308a.

In the present embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 306, the universal figure unit 38 displays the result of the electric accessory release lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 306. Until (that is, the variable time from the start of the variable display of the general-purpose picture unit 38 to the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory release lottery), the game ball is a through gate. It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 after passing through 306. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is about 0.2 seconds, the universal figure unit 38. The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38 until the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening/closing door 208b is closed immediately after the variation of the universal figure unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric figure opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will start.

In the present embodiment as well, similar to the above-described eighth embodiment, the opening/closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal graphic unit 38. Until then, there is a time required for control of about 0.004 seconds, but in addition to the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b, the time required for control is taken into consideration. The time from when the ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entrance device 308 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state, after the game ball passes through the through gate 306, It is set to a time shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the opening/closing ball entrance device 308.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 and is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the main controller 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery. The opening/closing door 308b is transitioned from the closed state to the open state before the timing of reaching the ball device 308. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery enters the second starting opening 308a provided inside the opening/closing door 308b when the electric prize opening lottery is won. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode, a second high-frequency support mode, and a third high-frequency support mode as types of high-frequency support modes that control the opening/closing door 308b. ing. In the first high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening/closing door 308b is opened when the electric accessory opening lottery is won is 1 and the opening time is 0. It is set to 5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening/closing door 308b is opened is 1 and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric accessory opening lottery. It is set to 1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the number of times the opening/closing door 308b is opened once in the electric accessory opening lottery is 1 and the opening time is 1 It is set to 7 seconds. That is, the difference between the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time that the opening/closing door 308b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening unit 300. In the case where the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second starting opening unit 300 is tilted to the right and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is tilted to the right, the first When the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and to the route R11 by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306, and if the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing entrance device 308 is in an open state, enters the second starting opening 308a provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will be. That is, the locus of the first game ball GB1 entered is the locus L1 shown in FIG.

When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. If the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is in an open state, it is provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, the locus of the second game ball GB2 entered is the locus L2 shown in FIG. 79.

When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is distributed to the route R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and the path by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. Assigned to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. If the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is in an open state, it is provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the locus of the game ball GB3 that entered the third ball is the locus L3 shown in FIG. 79.

When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB4 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. If the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is in an open state, it is provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, the locus of the game ball GB4 that entered the fourth ball is the locus L4 shown in FIG. 79.

In a situation where the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters from the opening 302, the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is tilted to the right, and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is It is tilted to the right. Therefore, the locus of the game ball that entered the fifth ball is the same as the locus L1 of the game ball GB1 that entered the first ball. That is, the 2nd starting opening unit 300 of this embodiment will return to an original state by entering four game balls.

Here, in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing strength that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 300, A case where the first to third high frequency support modes are executed will be described.

When the first high frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 308b is set to 1 and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds in the case of winning in the accessory opening lottery. Therefore, the opening and closing door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening and closing ball entrance device 308, but the second to fourth game balls GB2 to GB4. Is in a closed state at the timing of reaching the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. As a result, when the first high-frequency support mode is executed, only the first game ball GB1 of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 is provided on the inner side of the opening/closing door 308b. It will enter the mouth 308a.

When the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and The number of times the opening/closing door 308b is opened is 1 and the opening time is set to 1.1 seconds in the case of winning the prize opening lottery. Therefore, the opening and closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening and closing entrance device 308 and the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening and closing entrance device 308. However, it is in a closed state at the timing when the third to fourth gaming balls GB3 to GB4 reach the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. As a result, when the second high frequency support mode is executed, the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will enter the second starting port 308a.

When the third high frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. The number of times of opening and closing the opening/closing door 308b is set to 1 and the opening time is set to 1.7 seconds in the case of winning in the accessory open lottery. Therefore, the opening/closing door 308b is the timing at which the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308, the timing at which the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308, and the third. The game ball GB3 is in the open state at the timing of reaching the opening/closing ball entrance device 308, but is in the closed state at the timing of the fourth game ball GB4 reaching the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. As a result, when the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the first to third gaming balls GB1 to GB3 of the four gaming balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting opening 308a.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. For reference, this FIG. 80 also shows the type and contents of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open/close execution mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high frequency support modes executed after the end of the open/close execution mode are the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode. Is set. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening 308a is set to two.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33 is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 9, 8R Normally, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the first high-frequency support mode is entered. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot is performed, and also to the first high-frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is performed, and the switching to the second high frequency support mode is performed after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is performed, and also to the third high-frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R Normally, the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, the first high-frequency support mode is entered. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and also shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the process shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R certainty variation jackpot and to the second high-frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the switching to the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 16R certainty variation jackpot is performed, and also to the third high frequency support mode after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the game balls are fired in a situation in which the game ball firing mechanism 81 has a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 300 and is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball-out rate, and the ball-out rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed is output. It is defined as the sphere rate Mi. In the following, the ball exit rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ball exit rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the second high frequency support mode are executed. The exit rate M3 in the case will be described.

In the first high frequency support mode, the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 300. Then, as described above, one of the four game balls that has been fired enters the second starting opening 308a of the opening/closing ball input device 308, and two game balls are paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the exit rate M1 in the case where the first high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1=2/4=0.50

Here, the rate of exit is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200, and the game ball continues at 0.6 second intervals. It means that the player's hand-held game balls are reduced in the situation that the player has been fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired within 2.4 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the game balls that the player has are It will decrease at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 in 1.2 seconds).

In the second high-frequency support mode, the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 300. Then, as described above, two of the four game balls that have been fired enter the second starting opening 308a of the opening and closing ball entrance device 308, and the four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the exit rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2=4/4=1.00

Here, the rate of ball launch is 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200, continuously at 0.6 second intervals. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the situation where the player has been launched. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high frequency support mode, four game balls are fired within 2.4 seconds and four game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the game balls that the player has are It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high-frequency support mode, the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 300. Then, as described above, three game balls out of the four game balls fired enter the second starting opening 308a of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the exit rate M3 in the case where the third high frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M3=6/4=1.50

Here, when the rate of ball launch exceeds 1, it means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that allows the game ball launching mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200, and the game ball continues at 0.6 second intervals. It means that the number of game balls held by the player increases in a situation where the game balls are being fired. Therefore, the third high-frequency support mode means that the number of game balls held by the player is increased. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired within 2.4 seconds and six game balls are paid out as prize balls, so that the game balls held by the player are It will increase at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 in 1.2 seconds).

Further, the proportion of the i-th high-frequency support mode executed when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is defined as PAi. To do. Then, the proportion PA1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the proportion PA2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed, and the proportion PA3 in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1=the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0-19) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33 and shift to the first high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counters C2 (20 to 24) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and shift to the second high frequency support mode / jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=5/30
PA3=the number of jackpot type counters C2 (25 to 29) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and shift to the third high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=5/30

Further, the total outgoing rate in the case where the high hit support is executed by winning the big hit lottery based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is defined as the first total outgoing rate T1. , The first total rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

In the above formula (3), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and n=3 in this embodiment. Therefore, the first total ball launch rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
=0.50×(20/30)+1.00×(5/30)+1.50×(5/30)
= 0.75

That is, the first total ball-out rate T1 is the sum of the ball-out rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the sphere rate.

Further, the proportion of the i-th high-frequency support mode executed in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a is defined as PBi. To do. Then, the ratio PB1 in which the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PB2 in which the second high-frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PB3 in which the third high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PB1=the number of jackpot type counters C2 (0 to 11) that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a and shifts to the first high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=12/30
PB2=number of jackpot type counters C2 (12 to 20) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a and shift to the second high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=9/30
PB3 = number of jackpot type counter C2 values (21 to 29) that will win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 308a and shift to the third high frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=9/30

In addition, when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 308a is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total outgoing rate is defined as the second total outgoing rate T2. , The second total rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

In the above formula (4), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n=3. Therefore, the second total ball exit rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
=0.50×(12/30)+1.00×(6/30)+1.50×(6/30)
= 0.95

That is, the second total ball-out rate T2 is the sum of the ball-out rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the sphere rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the value of the first total ball exit rate T1 and the second total ball exit rate T2 are All of the values are less than 1. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the processing (FIG. 10, FIG. 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments will be described.

In step S4706, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. Since the processing in each of the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 10, FIG. 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a shift process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment when the opening/closing execution mode ends. The main difference from the process (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the first to third high frequency support corresponding to each of the three types of high frequency support modes. This is the point to store the flag. The first to third high frequency support flags are used to determine whether or not the first to third high frequency support modes are being executed. The details will be described below.

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag is stored as the jackpot type flag in the RAM 64.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the flow advances to step S4802 to execute a flag erasing process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for identifying the gaming state. Specifically, when the open/close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and When these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. After executing step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

In step S4803, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4804 and the third high-frequency support flag is stored. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Then, it progresses to step S4805.

In step S4805, a high-probability mode command that is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process advances to step S4806, and the third high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, is sent to the voice emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. After that, the transition processing at the end of the main opening/closing execution mode ends. The voice light emission control device 90 that has received the third high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect that suggests that it is advantageous to the player even if the number of game balls is increasing and the jackpot is difficult to win. Can be mentioned.

If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: NO), the flow advances to step S4807 to determine whether the RAM 64 stores the 8R probability variation flag as a jackpot type flag. judge. If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the flow advances to step S4808 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the process advances to step S4809.

In step S4809, the high-probability mode flag is stored, after which the flow proceeds to step S4810 to store the second high-frequency support flag. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit. Then, it progresses to step S4811.

In step S4811, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process advances to step S4812, and the second high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. After that, the transition processing at the end of the main opening/closing execution mode ends. The voice light emission control device 90 that has received the second high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, for example, that the number of game balls has neither increased nor decreased, and it is not disadvantageous to the player even if the jackpot is difficult to win. You can list the suggested productions.

If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the flow advances to step S4813 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the process advances to step S4814.

In step S4814, after storing the first high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S4815, and "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the first high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode, and the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends after 100 game times have been executed, and thereafter, the normal game state in which the win/loss lot mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Transition. After executing step S4815, the process advances to step S4816.

In step S4816, the first high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, is to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set as a command. After that, the transition processing at the end of the main opening/closing execution mode ends. The voice light emission control device 90 that has received the first high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, for example, there is an effect that suggests that a situation in which the number of game balls is decreasing and a jackpot is difficult to win is disadvantageous to the player. You can

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that different open times are set for each of the three types of high frequency support modes. The details will be described below.

In step S4901, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 308b as the electric accessory is open. Whether or not the opening/closing door 308b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the opening/closing door 308b is opened (S4901: YES), the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening/closing door 308b. When it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4902: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the opening/closing door 308b has not ended, the main power combination opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4902: YES), the process proceeds to step S4903, and a closing process for controlling the opening/closing door 308b to the closed state is performed. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the opening/closing door 308b is "0", the opening/closing door 308b is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is opened/closed this time. "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of. After executing step S4903, the process advances to step S4904.

In step S4904, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4905, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4905: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4905: YES), the process proceeds to step S4906 and the in-support flag is erased. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the opening/closing door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the flow advances to step S4907 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the opening/closing door 308b. When it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4907: YES), the flow advances to step S4908 to execute an opening process for controlling the open/close door 308b to be in the open state. Then, it progresses to step S4909.

In step S4909, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (S4909: NO), the flow advances to step S4910 to determine whether or not the first high frequency support mode. Determine whether.

If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high-frequency support mode is in progress (S4910: YES), the flow advances to step S4911 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4910 that the first high frequency support mode is not in effect (S4910: NO), the flow advances to step S4912 to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is in effect.

If it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is being performed (S4912: YES), the flow advances to step S4913 to set "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4912: NO), the flow advances to step S4914 to determine whether or not the third high frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is being performed (S4914: YES), the flow advances to step S4915 to set "850" (that is, 1.7 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4914: NO), then control proceeds to step S4916. Then, the process proceeds to set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 assigned to the route R11 can pass through the through gate 306 and the opening/closing door 308b is in the open state. It is possible to enter the ball into the second starting opening 308a. On the other hand, since the three game balls GB2, GB3, GB4 that have arrived after the first game ball GB1 are distributed to the route R2 or the route R12, it is impossible to pass through the through gate 306, and the opening/closing is performed. When the door 308b is open, it is possible to enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, of the four game balls, only the first game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 306, and each of the four game balls is in the second starting opening 308a. Whether or not to enter the ball depends on whether or not the open/close door 308b is in the open state at the timing when each of the four game balls reaches the open/close entrance device 308. Therefore, of the four game balls, the number of game balls passing through the through gate 306 is set to one, and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 308a is changed depending on the state of the opening/closing door 308b. Can be made.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 controls the opening/closing door 308b based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Since the three game balls GB2, GB3, GB4 that have arrived after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 causes each of the four game balls to enter/exit the ball-entry device 308. Whether to open or close the state of the opening and closing door 308b at the reached timing, that is, whether to insert each of the four game balls into the second starting opening 308a, the first game It is determined according to the result of the electric accessory release lottery executed when the ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and the type of the support mode. Therefore, control of whether or not each of the four game balls is put into the second starting opening 308a is realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the first game ball GB1 through the through gate 306. can do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from the start of the variable display of the light emitting display unit of the universal figure unit 38 to the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric lottery opening lottery is the electric part. The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the open lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Therefore, the universal figure unit 38 opens the electric auditors product before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 and triggered the electric auditors item opening lottery reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. It is possible to display the result of the lottery. Here, since the main controller 60 starts the control based on the result of the electric accessory release lottery after the result of the electric accessory release lottery is displayed by the universal graphic unit 38, the main controller 60 passes through the through gate 306. The control based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery can be started before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory opening lottery reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. As a result, the main controller 60 realizes the high frequency support mode in which the opening/closing door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. Is possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 makes the time length of maintaining the open state after the opening/closing door 208b transits from the closed state to the open state different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 308a and the three game balls GB2, GB3, GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the second starting ports. The first high-frequency support mode (exit rate M1=0.50) that does not enter 308a, and the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting opening 308a and the third one. And the fourth gaming balls GB3, GB4 are the second high-frequency support mode in which the second starting opening 308a does not enter (ball-out rate M2=1.00), and the first to third gaming balls GB1, GB2 and GB3 enter the second starting port 308a and the fourth gaming ball GB4 does not enter the second starting port 308a. Third high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M3=1.50) is realized. Has been done. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different exit rates, so that intonation can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the alternate distribution mechanism (the first alternate distribution mechanism 304, the second alternate distribution mechanism 305) that alternately distributes the game balls to one of the two paths is provided in two stages. Since the configuration combined with is adopted, one gaming ball GB1 that has reached the second starting opening unit 300 is distributed to the route R11 and three gaming balls GB1, GB2 that have arrived after the gaming ball GB1, The function of allocating GB3 to a route (routes R2 and R12) different from the route R11 can be realized with a simpler configuration than a configuration realized using electronic control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, a structure in which the number of game balls reaching the second starting opening unit 300 is measured using a counter or the like and driven by an electric force A configuration in which game balls are distributed by using, for example, can be mentioned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a type of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is executed in spite of the fact that the third high frequency support mode in which the rate of departure is more than 1 can be executed. Since the total ball exit rate (the first total ball exit rate T1 and the second total ball exit rate T2) is less than 1, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement in the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. While making it possible, by suppressing the first total ball-out rate T1 and the second total ball-out rate T2 to be less than 1, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to increase excessively. As a result, the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high frequency support mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1 is being executed, the number of game balls held by the player is increased. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high-frequency support mode will continue for a long time. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery is switched to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, and the third high-frequency support mode is executed. Then, the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode continue until the big hit lottery is won next time. In other words, the high-probability mode does not end until the next big-win lottery is won (so-called loop machine), so winning the big-win lottery during the high-probability mode is guaranteed, until you win the big-win lottery. The third high-frequency support mode in which the game balls increase will continue. Therefore, the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high-probability mode. Therefore, the player is not expected to win the jackpot lottery for as long as possible, and the third high-frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time. You will have high expectations. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new expectation that the third high frequency support mode should be continued for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery as long as possible during the high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode is set low, the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are likely to continue for a long time. Therefore, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high-frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode adopt a configuration (so-called special time machine (ST machine)) that ends after a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times) of the jackpot lottery, Since the player wants to continue the third high-frequency support mode for as long as possible to increase the number of game balls, he/she does not want to win the jackpot lottery in the game time immediately after switching to the high-probability mode. However, before the high-probability mode ends, I have the expectation that I want you to win the jackpot lottery.

Then, when the jackpot lottery is won at the game time shortly after the transition to the high probability mode, the player has a regrettable feeling that the third high frequency support mode has ended in a short period of time. Then, after all, I have a feeling of satisfaction that I won the jackpot lottery before the high-probability mode ended. Further, when the jackpot lottery is won in the game round just before the high-probability mode ends, the player has been able to greatly increase the number of game balls by continuing the third high-frequency support mode for a long period of time. You will have the satisfaction and satisfaction of winning the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ends. That is, when the jackpot lottery is won in the game round just before the high-probability mode ends, the player can feel double satisfaction. Also, if the jackpot lottery is not won before the high probability mode ends, the player is satisfied that the third high frequency support mode has continued for a long period of time and the number of game balls can be increased significantly. On the other hand, I have a feeling that I didn't win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. That is, it is possible to provide the player with complicated intonation in the high-probability mode, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, another example of the configuration of the second starting opening unit will be described. As described below, various configurations can be adopted as the second starting opening unit.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting opening unit. For reference, FIG. 84(A) schematically shows the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 84 shows the order and distribution destination of the game balls that have entered the second starting opening unit.

In FIG. 84(B), the second starting opening unit 300B is schematically shown as an example 1. The difference from the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84(A) is that the game balls assigned to the route R2 have the second starting opening 308a even when the opening/closing door 308b is in the open state. The point is that it is impossible to enter. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening and closing ball entrance device 308 is short, regardless of the control mode of the opening and closing door 308b in each high frequency support mode, the second and fourth game balls. Cannot enter the second starting opening 308a. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the second starting opening 308a among the game balls that enter the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300.

In FIG. 84(C), as a second example, the second starting opening unit 300C is schematically shown. Further, FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second starting opening unit 300C. The difference from the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84(A) and 78 is that the route R2 and the route R12 merge to form one route. According to such a configuration, the second starting opening unit can be downsized, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

In FIG. 84(D), as a third example, the second starting opening unit 300D is schematically shown. The difference from the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84(A) is that a third alternate distribution mechanism 305A is provided on the downstream side of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. is there. The third alternate distribution mechanism 305A alternately distributes the game balls flowing down the route R11 to the left route R111 and the right route R112.

The route R111 is configured such that the sorted gaming balls pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted gaming balls are the second when the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing entrance device 308 is in the open state. It is configured to be able to enter the starting opening 308a. The route R112 is configured such that the sorted gaming balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted gaming balls are in the open/close door 308b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308. In some cases, it is possible to enter the second starting opening 308a.

According to such a configuration, only one game ball out of the eight game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300D passes through the through gate 306. In other words, after one game ball passes through the through gate 306, the following seven game balls do not pass through the through gate 306, and the ninth game ball passes through the through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the opening/closing door 308b to a different length for each high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 308a can be set to any one of 1 to 8. Can be set to a value. For example, when the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting opening 308a is set to two, the following eight types A high frequency support mode can be realized.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 1× 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and 6 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 2/ 8 = 0.25

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 2× 2 = 4 Increase/decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4 game balls are reduced by 4 in 4.8 seconds Ball ejection rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls to be fired = 4/ 8 = 0.50

・Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 3× 2 = 6 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and 2 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 6/ 8 = 0.75

・4th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of opening/closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 4× 2 = 8 Game balls increase/decrease: No increase/decrease Ball discharge rate: Number of game balls to be paid out/Number of game balls fired = 8/8 = 1.00

・Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls launched: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 5× 2 = 10 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and two game balls are increased in 4.8 seconds. Ball discharge rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired=10/ 8 = 1.25

・Sixth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 6× 2 = 12 Game balls increase/decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4 game balls increase by 4 in 4.8 seconds Ball ejection rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired=12/ 8 = 1.50

・7th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls launched: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 7× 2 = 14 Increase/decrease in game balls: Eight game balls are fired 6 game balls increase by 6 in 4.8 seconds Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired = 14/ 8 = 1.75

・8th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 8× 2 = 16 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, 8 game balls are increased in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 16/ 8 = 2.00

In this way, by adopting the configuration of the second starting opening unit 300D, it is possible to set the types of the high frequency support mode in multiple stages. Further, if the alternate distribution mechanism is further configured in multiple stages, it is possible to further increase the number of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 306 and set the type of the high frequency support mode in multiple stages. It will be possible. Further, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the second starting opening 308a can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when the number of prize balls is set to three in the above eight types of high frequency support modes, each high frequency support mode is as follows.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 1× 3 = 3 Increase/decrease in game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and 5 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired=3/ 8 = 0.375

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 2× 3 = 6 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and two game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired=6/ 8 = 0.75

・Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 3× 3=9 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, and one game ball is increased in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out/Number of game balls to be fired=9/ 8 = 1.125

・4th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of opening/closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 4× 3 = 12 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired 4 game balls increase by 4.8 seconds Outgoing rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 12/ 8 = 1.50

・Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls launched: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 5× 3=15 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, 7 game balls are increased in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out/Number of game balls to be fired=15/ 8 = 1.875

・Sixth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open/close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 6× 3 = 18 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired, 10 game balls are increased in 4.8 seconds. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired=18/ 8 = 2.25

・7th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls launched: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 7× 3=21 Increase/decrease of game balls: Eight game balls are fired 13 game balls are increased in 4.8 seconds Sphere rate: Number of game balls paid out/Number of game balls fired=21/ 8 = 2.625

・8th High Frequency Support Mode:
Opening time of the opening/closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls paid out=number of game balls entered×number of prize balls: 8× 3 = 24 Game balls increase/decrease: 8 game balls are fired 16 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball ejection rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 24/ 8 = 3.00

In FIG. 84(E), as a fourth example, the second starting opening unit 300E is schematically shown. The difference from the second starting port unit 300D of the example 3 shown in FIG. 84(D) is that the game balls distributed to the route R2 enter the second starting port 308a even when the opening/closing door 308b is in the open state. The point is that it is impossible to make a sphere. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening/closing ball entrance device 308 is short, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth doors are irrespective of the control mode of the opening/closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. The game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 308a. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the second starting opening 308a among the game balls that enter the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300E.

In FIG. 84(F), as a fifth example, the second starting opening unit 300F is schematically shown. The difference from the second starting opening unit 300D of the example 3 shown in FIG. 84(D) is that the route R2, the route R12, and the route R112 merge to form one route. According to such a configuration, the second starting opening unit can be downsized, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

J. Tenth Embodiment:
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as that of the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the manner of controlling the opening/closing door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening/closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configurations and processes as those in the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and there are two types of winning when the electric accessory release lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode (first type electric role opening and Type 2 electric role open) is set. Further, when the electric accessory release lottery is won during the low frequency support mode, one type of winning (third type electric role open) is set. The details of the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・Electric role release lottery during high-frequency support mode Variation time of universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Win probability: 100%
As a result of being elected, the proportion allocated to the opening of the first type of electric role: 50%
As a result of being elected, the proportion allocated to the opening of the second type electric role: 50%
・When you win the opening of the 1st type electric outlet Open waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time of the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds ・Opening the 2nd type electric outlet In case of winning the opening/closing door 208b opening waiting time: 0.25 seconds Opening/closing door 208b opening frequency: 1 time Opening/closing door 208b opening time: 0.8 seconds

・Electric role opening lottery in low frequency support mode Variation time of universal figure unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the third electric role: 100%
・If you win the third type electric opening Open waiting time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Opening times for opening/closing door 208b: 1 time Opening time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the above-described control mode of the opening/closing door 208b, the difference between the case where the first type electric role opening is won and the second type electric role opening is won in the high-frequency support mode is the variable display of the universal figure unit 38. Is the length of the waiting time for opening, which is the time from the stop of the opening of the door 208b to the start of the transition to the open state. The number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is different in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds which is the interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the first type electric role opening is won. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and a control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the case of winning the first type electric role opening. In the example shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in state A1 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and the state of FIG. 86. It becomes A2.

As shown in state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held in the left holding part 204e falls from the left holding part 204e, and the left route R1. Be assigned to. After that, the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric auditors item open lottery in the high frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. When the first type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is 0.05 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is 0. It is set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when main controller 60 determines that the opening standby time has elapsed (FIG. 91: S5123, which will be described later), main controller 60 starts transition of opening/closing door 208b to the open state. The process to be performed is executed not in the electric power combination opening/closing process in the next round which is executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds, but in the electric power role opening/closing process in the same round (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 described later). For this reason, the time required for control from the passage of the opening standby time to the start of the transition of the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 to the open state is significantly shorter than 0.004 seconds. There is.

Therefore, the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing entrance device 208 transits to the open state about 0.1 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. 87). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, the through gate 206 is set. At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202 and becomes the state A3 in FIG. 86.

As shown in state A3 of FIG. 86, when the next game ball GB2 of the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and the state A4 in FIG. Becomes

As shown in state A4 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held in the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f, and the right route R2. Be assigned to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, so after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the game ball GB2 is opened/closed. The interval until reaching the ball entrance device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, so that the opening/closing door 208b maintains the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. .. As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a, the opening/closing door 208b is closed and the state is A1 again. Since the opening time of the open/close door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the open/close door 208b is set before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. Then, it becomes a closed state.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. When the first type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery during the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggers the electric auditors opening lottery reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. The open/close door 208b is transitioned to the open state, and the open/close door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 assigned to the route R2 reaches the open/close ball entrance device 208. As a result, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, both game balls enter the second starting opening 208a.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the second type electric role opening is won. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing entrance device 208, and a control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the case where the second type electric role opening is won. The example shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 in that the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, and the sheet passes through the through gate 206. The game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a. The details will be described below.

As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and becomes the state A2. ..

As shown in state A2 of FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e falls from the left holding portion 204e, and the left route R1. Be assigned to. After that, the game ball GB1 assigned to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric auditors item open lottery in the high frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. When the first type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is 0.25 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is 0. It is set to 8 seconds. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for the control from the passage of the opening standby time to the start of the transition of the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 to the open state is 0.004. The time is significantly shorter than the second.

Therefore, the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing entrance device 208 transits to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. 89). As described above, in this embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, the through gate 206 is set. The opening/closing door 208b is maintained in the closed state at the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and the gaming ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a, and the opening/closing ball entrance device. Pass 208. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202 and becomes the state A3 in FIG. 88.

As shown in state A3 of FIG. 88, when the next game ball GB2 of the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and becomes the state A4.

As shown in state A4 of FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f drops from the right holding portion 204f, and the right route R2. Be assigned to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, so after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the game ball GB2 is opened/closed. The interval until reaching the ball entrance device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, so that the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. .. As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a, the opening/closing door 208b is closed and the state is A1 again. Since the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b is set before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. 89. Then, it becomes a closed state.

That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting opening unit 200. When the second type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery during the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggers the electric auditors opening lottery reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. The open/close door 208b maintains the closed state, and the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state at the timing at which the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the open/close entrance ball device 208. As a result, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, one game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b, 1.2 seconds (FIG. 87, FIG. 89) after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. 2 It is possible to change the number of game balls entering the starting port 208a.

In the low frequency support mode, when the third type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is 29.5 seconds and the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is 0. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b will transition to the open state after the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 have passed through the opening/closing entrance device 208. That is, when the third type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery during the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 do not enter the second starting opening 208a.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the shift processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment at the end of the open/close execution mode. The main difference from the process (FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the high frequency support mode is one type in the present embodiment, and therefore the high frequency support flag is set. The point is that the type is not set. The details will be described below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag in step S5004. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. Further, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag in step S5007. As a result, after ending the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. The process in each of the other steps is the same as the process (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a power combination support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 76) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the opening standby time corresponding to the type of electric role release won in the electric accessory release lottery is determined. This is the point to set. The details will be described below.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S 5101 that the in-support flag is not stored (S 5101: NO), the process proceeds to step S 5102.

In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the power combination opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. When it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

When it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5103: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S5104 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S5104: YES), the flow advances to step S5105 to set the out-of-display, and then the processing for main electric power support is terminated. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is ended in the state where the deviation display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S5104: NO), the flow proceeds to step S5106.

In step S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than "0". When it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is "0" (S5106: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, in step S5106, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (S5106: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S5108, in which it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If the open/close execution mode is not set in step S5107 (S5107: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S5108 (S5108: YES), the flow advances to step S5109 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric power combination holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value of the lottery execution area is compared with the electric accessory release lottery table for the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, and the proportion allocated to the first type electric role opening is 50%, and the second type electric role opening. The distribution ratio is set to 50%. Specifically, since the possible values of the electric accessory release counter C4 are 0 to 249, if the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, If the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is 125 to 249, the first type electric role is opened, and the second type electric role is opened. After executing the electric accessory release lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Then, it progresses to step S5110.

In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S5109 is a win to open the electric role (support win). When it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, the support winning flag is stored, and various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. Then, "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. In the present embodiment, as a result of the electric accessory release lottery during the high-frequency support mode, if the first type electric role opening is won, the first type support winning flag is stored, and the second type electric role opening is performed. In the case of winning, the type 2 support winning flag is stored. After that, the process advances to step S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode. When it is determined in step S5112 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5112 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S5112: NO), the electric power combination supporting process is ended as it is.

In step S5113, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S5113: NO), the main power combination support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5113 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S5114, and the high frequency support flag is erased. Then, it progresses to step S5115.

In step S5115, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process for supporting electric power is ended.

If it is determined in step S5107 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric power combination holding area 64c is shifted, and the value in the lottery execution area is compared with the electric accessory open lottery table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the proportion assigned to the opening of the third type electric role is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible values of the electric accessory release counter C4 are 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, You will be elected to open the 3rd role. After executing the electric accessory release lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Then, it progresses to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S5116 is a win to open the electric role (support win). When it is determined in step S5117 that the support is not won (S5117: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in step S5117, when it is determined that the support is won (S5117: YES), the process proceeds to step S5118, after storing the support winning flag and setting “1” in the second round counter area RC2, The processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the flow advances to step S5119 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5119: NO), the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 are being displayed in a variable manner, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5119: YES), the process proceeds to step S5120.

In step S5120, a hit display corresponding to the type of the winning combination is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbols in the universal symbol unit 38 ends, and the symbols corresponding to the type of the hit display are stopped and displayed. Then, it progresses to step S5121.

In step S5121, the opening waiting time corresponding to the type of the winning combination is set. Specifically, when the first type electric outlet is opened, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the opening standby time timer counter area Tw, and the second type electric outlet is opened or the third type electric outlet is opened. When the player has won the opening, "125" (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the opening waiting time timer counter area Tw. The open waiting time timer counter area Tw is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated. After that, the process advances to step S5122, the in-support flag is stored, and the support win flag is erased. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If it is determined in step S 5101 that the in-support flag is stored (S 5101: YES), the flow advances to step S 5123 to determine whether the open waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the open waiting time timer counter area Tw is "0". When it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the opening standby time timer counter area Tw is “0” (S5123: YES), the process proceeds to step S5124, and the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory is controlled to be opened/closed. Executes electric power opening/closing processing. Details of the power combination opening/closing process will be described later. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended. On the other hand, in step S5123, when it is determined that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is not “0” (S5123: NO), the electric power support opening/closing process is not executed, and the main electric power support support process is ended. To do.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening/closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that, when the power combination opening is won during the high frequency support mode, the winning power combination is won. Regardless of the type of opening, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, and when the electric power is opened during the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.2 seconds. Is the point to set. The details will be described below.

In step S5201, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory is open. Whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the opening/closing door 208b is opened (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

In step S5202, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the opening/closing door 208b. When it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5202: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the opening/closing door 208b has not ended, the main power combination opening/closing process ends.

When it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5202: YES), the process proceeds to step S5203, and a closing process for controlling the open/close door 208b to the closed state is performed. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Note that the value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203 is the value of the opening/closing door 208b when the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory opens a plurality of times in one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. It means the time length (interval) from closing to the next opening, and is the final transition from the open state to the closed state of the opening/closing door 208b triggered by one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. In this case, it means the length of time to wait until the next electric accessory opening lottery is executed after the opening/closing door 208b is closed. After executing step S5203, the process advances to step S5204.

In step S5204, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the flow proceeds to step S5205 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S5205: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S5205: YES), the process proceeds to step S5206 and the in-support flag is erased. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step S5201 that the opening/closing door 208b is not open (S5201: NO), the flow advances to step S5207 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the opening/closing door 208b. When it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5207: YES), the flow advances to step S5208 to execute an opening process for controlling the open/close door 208b to the open state. Then, it progresses to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined that the open/close execution mode is not in effect (S5209: NO), the flow advances to step S5210 to determine whether or not in the high frequency support mode. To judge.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S5210: YES), the flow advances to step S5211 to set "400" (that is, 0.8 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that the high-frequency support mode is not in progress (S5210: NO), and if it is determined in step S5209 that the open/close execution mode is in progress (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5212. Then, the process proceeds to set "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening/closing process is ended.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the same effect as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is obtained, and by changing the opening standby time of the opening/closing door 208b, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. It is possible to change the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a per 1.2 seconds (FIG. 87, FIG. 89) after the start. Therefore, intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), if the length of the opening waiting time is changed. Since the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment) in the high frequency support mode, the opening/closing door 208b. By setting the opening waiting time of a plurality of types of lengths (0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds in this embodiment), the opening/closing door 208b is opened from the closed state after the game ball passes through the through gate 206. The time until the transition to the state is started (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38 until the opening/closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state (opening of the opening/closing door 208b). By changing the waiting time, the time from the passage of the game ball through the through gate 206 until the opening/closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + opening/closing door 208b). It is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the second starting opening 208a, as well as to change the opening waiting time).

Further, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60, during the high-frequency support mode, changes the time of the universal figure unit 38 after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and then the game ball GB1 is opened and closed. The time is set shorter than the time required to reach the ball device 208. Therefore, the universal figure unit 38 displays the result of the electric accessory release lottery before the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the electric accessory release lottery reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208. It becomes possible to display. As a result, the main controller 60, after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the universal figure unit 38, passes through the through gate 206 and becomes a trigger for the electric auditors opening lottery GB1. It is possible to execute the control for starting the transition of the open/close door 208b from the closed state to the open state (control in the case of winning the first-class electric role opening) before the timing when the open/close entrance ball device 208 is reached. Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 (the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and has been a trigger for the electric accessory release lottery) that triggered the opening/closing door 208b to enter the open state is inserted into the second starting opening 208a. It becomes possible to execute control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type electric role opening is won (FIG. 86, FIG. 87 ), the main controller 60 sets the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b to 0.05 seconds. , At the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. On the other hand, when the second type electric role opening is won (FIGS. 88 and 89 ), the main controller 60 sets the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208 b to 0.25 seconds, and therefore the through gate 206 is passed. At the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has not transitioned to the open state yet, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the second starting opening 208a by changing the opening waiting time, so that intonation can be added to the game, and The interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is set based on the type of winning the electric accessory opening lottery during the high frequency support mode, but the opening/closing door is set based on other factors. The opening waiting time of 208b may be set. For example, in a configuration capable of executing a plurality of types of support modes, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b may be set to different lengths for each type of support mode. Further, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b may be set to different lengths for each type of the lottery mode (low probability mode and high probability mode) of the big hit lottery. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a random number counter for setting the opening waiting time is provided and the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is set based on the acquired value of the random number counter. Further, when the jackpot lottery is won, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is based on the type of winning the jackpot lottery in a predetermined number of game times after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the winning is ended. May be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is changed by changing the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b, but the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is changed. By doing so, the number of game balls that enter the second starting opening 208a may be changed. Further, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a may be changed by changing both the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b. Moreover, in addition to the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b and the variation time of the universal figure unit 38, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is changed to change the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a. May be

In addition, by changing the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is changed, and the second starting opening unit 300, 300B of the above-described ninth embodiment is described. You may apply to 300F (FIG. 78, FIG. 84, FIG. 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the opening/closing door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening/closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configurations and processes as those of the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, three types of high-frequency support modes are set, and one type (first-class electric role release) of the winning type is set when the electric role opening lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode. Has been done. In addition, when the electric accessory release lottery is won in the low frequency support mode, one type of winning (second type electric role open) is set. The details of the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・Electric accessory release lottery during the first high frequency support mode Variation time of the universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the first electric role: 100%
・If you win the opening of the 1st type electric role Open/close door 208b waiting time: 0.95 seconds Open/close door 208b opening count: 1 time Open/close door 208b open time: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory release lottery during the second high frequency support mode Variation time of the universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the first electric role: 100%
・If you win the opening of the 1st type electric role Open/close door 208b waiting time: 0.25 seconds Open/close door 208b opening count: 1 time Open/close door 208b open time: 0.8 seconds

・Electric power accessory release lottery during the third high-frequency support mode Variation time of the universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the first electric role: 100%
・When elected to open the first electric service: Open/close door 208b open standby time: 0.05 seconds Open/close door 208b open count: 1 time Open/close door 208b open time: 0.8 seconds

・Electric role release lottery in low frequency support mode Variation time of universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Win probability: 10%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the second type electric role: 100%
・When winning the second class electric opening: Waiting time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times opening/closing door 208b: 1 time Opening time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b described above, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 is stopped until the opening/closing door 208b starts the transition to the open state. It is the length of the opening standby time, and as will be described later, in the situation where the game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals by the game ball firing mechanism 81, the game balls entering the second starting opening 208a The numbers are different. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds which is the interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and a control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the first high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in this FIG. 93, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 starts. .. When 0.05 seconds which is the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.95 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opening state and maintains the opening state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed open/close door 208b during 0.10 seconds until the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state, so it enters the second starting opening 208a. To do. In addition, at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so that the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

Then, when 0.8 seconds has elapsed and the opening/closing door 208b transits to the closed state, the variable display of the suspended universal figure unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 93, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 0.2 seconds after the variation display of the universal figure unit 38 is started. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 0.2 seconds after the variation display of the universal figure unit 38 is started. Therefore, among the game balls GB1 to GB3, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 enters the second starting opening 208a continues even after the game ball GB4. The first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a is set to two.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls paid out = number of game balls entered x number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds after each of the game balls is fired. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 2/3 / 0.67

FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and a control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the second high frequency support mode. In the example shown in this FIG. 94, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 starts. .. When 0.05 seconds which is the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.25 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opening state and maintains the opening state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the open/close door 208b in the closed state within 0.30 seconds until the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a because the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, the description is omitted because the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 is repeated. The second high-frequency support mode of this embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: Increase/decrease None Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out/Number of game balls to be fired = 2/2 = 1.00

FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing a timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and also showing a control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the third high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 starts. .. When 0.05 seconds which is the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transitions to the opening state and maintains the opening state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a because the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, the description is omitted because the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 is repeated. The third high-frequency support mode of this embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・Third high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls is increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. The rate of balls discharged: the number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls to be fired = 4/2 / 2.00

FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and showing the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the low frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal graphic unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.35 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opening state with a probability of 10%, and the opening state is changed to 0.2%. Hold for seconds. In the following, a case of winning the second type electric role opening with a probability of 10% will be described.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the open/close door 208b in the closed state within 0.40 seconds until the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state. Since the opening/closing door 208b has already transitioned to the closed state at the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208, the opening/closing door in the closed state does not enter the second starting opening 208a. Pass 208b. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, the description is omitted because the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 is repeated. The low-frequency support mode of this embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・Low frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 0/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 0 x 2 = 0 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls is reduced by 2 in 1.2 seconds after each game ball is shot Out rate: Number of game balls paid out / Number of game balls fired = 0/2 = 0

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. For reference, FIG. 97 also shows the types and contents of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open/close execution mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of the high frequency support modes executed after the end of the open/close execution mode are the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode. Is set.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33 is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, the distribution is performed. As a result, the 4R normal jackpot A is obtained, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the first high-frequency support mode is shifted. When the obtained value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R regular jackpot is performed. 3 Switch to high-frequency support mode. When the obtained value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is the 8R certainty variation jackpot, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R certainty variation jackpot is performed, and the second opening/closing execution mode is ended. Switch to high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, it is sorted. As a result, the 4R normal jackpot A is obtained, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the shift to the first high frequency support mode is performed. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R regular jackpot is performed. 3 Switch to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is the 8R certainty variation jackpot, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R certainty variation jackpot is performed. Switch to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the distribution result is the 16R certainty variation jackpot, shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the second after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. Switch to high-frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode, which normally shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game times are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Shift to infrequent support mode. Further, the high-frequency support mode, which shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit, continues without ending until the next big hit lottery. In addition, the high-probability mode that shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit is continued without ending until the next big hit lottery is won.

Moreover, the 1st total ball-out rate T1 and the 2nd total ball-out rate T2 in this embodiment are as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
= 0.67 x (6/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) + 2.00 x (6/30) = 0.83

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball-out rate T1 and the value of the second total ball-out rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the open waiting time, the first high-frequency support mode in which the launch rate is less than 1, and the second high-frequency support in which the launch rate is 1. Since it is possible to execute the mode and the third high-frequency support mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. In addition, according to the present embodiment, even if the time period during which the open/close door 208b is maintained in the open state is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the open waiting time is set. If changed, the above-mentioned three high-frequency support modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support with a launch rate of less than 1 is provided by the second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) having a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution mechanism 204. It is possible to execute a mode, a second high-frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate is 1, and a third high-frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1. That is, in order to execute the three high frequency support modes as compared with the configuration in which the three high frequency support modes are executed by the second starting opening unit 300 (FIG. 78) including the two alternate distribution mechanisms 304 and 305. Since the mechanism can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging another accessory in the empty game area.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 4R normal jackpot A, the high-probability mode is not started, but the first high-frequency support mode is started. When the first high-frequency support mode is started, the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering portion, so that the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the exit rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first high frequency support mode ends when the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the big hit lottery being a big hit. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting a big hit in the big hit lottery before the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches the specified number and the first high frequency support mode ends. In addition, the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, and therefore plays the game while expecting to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery as early as possible.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 8R certainty variation jackpot, the high-probability mode is started and the second high-frequency support mode is also started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the second high frequency support mode is started, the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering portion, so that the jackpot lottery is executed. In addition, since the rate of exit in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high-probability mode continues at least until the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (various jackpots). The second high-frequency support mode continues until the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (various jackpots). Therefore, the player expects that the high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode will continue until the big hit in the big-hit lottery, so that the result of the big-hit lottery becomes an 8R certainty variation jackpot and the high-probability mode continues. While playing the game. In addition, the player does not increase or decrease the number of game balls he or she has, so that he can concentrate on the type of result when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 4R normal jackpot, the high-probability mode is not started, but the third high-frequency support mode is started. When the third high frequency support mode is started, the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering portion, so that the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the rate of exit in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls that the player has is increasing. The third high-frequency support mode ends when the jackpot lottery result does not result in a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a prescribed number (100 times). Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until the number of times of executing the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but before the third high-frequency support mode ends. Play the game while expecting the result of the jackpot lottery to be a jackpot. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot by the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed (100 times), the player can play the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of having continued for the longest period.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize the three control modes to create a new gameplay property in which the player is provided with various senses of expectation. Can be planned. Further, according to the present embodiment, even with the same 4R normal jackpot, by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is reach, a longer variation time is set as the variation time of the special drawing unit 37 than when the jackpot lottery result is missed. It In the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the larger the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery result is reach, that is, the larger the number of times the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special map unit 37, The time required for the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times of 100 becomes long. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues continues for a long time, and thus the period during which the player's game balls increase increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to create a new gaming property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the big hit lottery reaches reach increases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, a longer time may be set as the variation time of the special drawing unit 37 as the number of jackpot lottery executed after the third high frequency support mode is started increases. According to this configuration, the closer the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed to the prescribed number of times, that is, 100 times, the longer the variation time of the special map unit 37 is set, so that the third high-frequency support mode in which game balls increase continues It will take longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that he/she does not win the jackpot lottery even though the number of times of executing the jackpot lottery draws close to 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode in which the release waiting time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high frequency support mode having a smaller ball-out rate than the first high frequency support mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the open waiting time is set to a plurality of lengths to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes. However, as another embodiment, the universal figure unit 38 has a plurality of fluctuation times. It may be configured such that a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the length to.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as that of the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high-probability mode ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of game times are executed without winning the jackpot lottery (so-called special time). Machine (ST machine)) and the contents of the sorting table are different. Hereinafter, differences from the eleventh embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configurations and processes as those of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 98 also shows types and contents of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open/close execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, it is sorted. As a result, the 4R normal jackpot A is obtained, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode, the shift to the first high frequency support mode is performed. When the obtained value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R regular jackpot is performed. 3 Switch to high-frequency support mode. When the obtained value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is the 8R certainty variation jackpot, the switching to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R certainty variation jackpot is performed, and the second opening/closing execution mode is ended. Switch to high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 17, the distribution is performed. As a result, the 10R certainty variation jackpot A is set, and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R certainty variation jackpot is entered, and after the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the first high frequency support mode is entered. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 18 to 26, the distribution result is 10R certainty variation jackpot B and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R certainty variation jackpot, and after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. 2 Shift to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 27 to 29, the distribution result is 10R certainty variation jackpot C and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R certainty variation jackpot. 3 Switch to high-frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode, which normally shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game times are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Shift to infrequent support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit is ended, a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game play without winning the big hit lottery. If it is executed, the process ends, and the low-frequency support mode is entered. Further, the high-probability mode, which shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation big hit, also ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game times are executed without winning the big hit lottery.

Moreover, the 1st total ball-out rate T1 and the 2nd total ball-out rate T2 in this embodiment are as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
= 0.67 x (18/30) + 1.00 x (9/30) + 2.00 x (3/30) = 0.90

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball-out rate T1 and the value of the second total ball-out rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is 10R certainty variation big hit A, the high probability mode is started and the first high frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is improved. Further, when the first high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the exit rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Then, the high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are ended when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a prescribed number (100 times). Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability mode ends. In addition, the player plays the game while expecting to win the jackpot in the earlier jackpot lottery in view of the expectation that the decrease of the game balls in his hand is minimized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R certainty variation jackpot B, the high-probability mode is started and the second high-frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the second high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. In addition, since the rate of exit in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are ended when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a prescribed number (100 times). Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability mode ends.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R certainty variation jackpot C, the high-probability mode is started and the third high-frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is improved. Further, when the third high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the rate of exit in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Then, the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are ended when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a prescribed number (100 times). Therefore, the player continues the third high frequency support mode until just before the number of times of executing the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but the number of times of executing the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times and becomes high. Before the probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are finished, a game is played while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Then, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot by the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed (100 times), the player can play the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of having continued for the longest period.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new playability in which various expectations are given to the player during the period in which the high-probability mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed. The interest can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even with the same 10R probability variation jackpot, by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to add intonation to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is reach, a longer variation time is set as the variation time of the special drawing unit 37 than when the jackpot lottery result is missed. It In the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the larger the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery result is reach, that is, the larger the number of times the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special map unit 37, The time required for the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times of 100 becomes long. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues continues for a long time, and thus the period during which the player's game balls increase increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high frequency support mode is executed, it is possible to create a new gaming property in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the result of the big hit lottery reaches reach increases. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, a longer time may be set as the variation time of the special drawing unit 37 as the number of jackpot lottery executed after the third high frequency support mode is started increases. According to this configuration, the closer the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed to the prescribed number of times, that is, 100 times, the longer the variation time of the special map unit 37 is set, so that the third high-frequency support mode in which game balls increase continues It will take longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that he/she does not win the jackpot lottery even though the number of times of executing the jackpot lottery draws close to 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode in which the release waiting time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode may be configured to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high frequency support mode having a smaller ball-out rate than the first high frequency support mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the open waiting time is set to a plurality of lengths to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes. However, as another embodiment, the universal figure unit 38 has a plurality of fluctuation times. It may be configured such that a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the length to.

M. Thirteenth Embodiment:
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment includes the same second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) as that of the above-mentioned twelfth embodiment. The difference from the twelfth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the opening/closing door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening/closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configurations and processes as those in the above-described twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and one type of win (first-class electric role release) is set when the electric accessory release lottery is won during the high-frequency support mode. Has been done. Then, three types of fluctuation times (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds) of the universal figure unit 38 set during the high frequency support mode are prepared. In addition, when the electric accessory release lottery is won in the low frequency support mode, one type of winning (second type electric role open) is set. The details of the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory opening lottery are as follows.

・Electric accessory release lottery during high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of universal figure unit 38: 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds, winning probability: 100%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the first electric role: 100%
・If you win the opening of the 1st type electric role Open/close door 208b waiting time: 0.95 seconds Open/close door 208b open count: 1 time Open/close door 208b open time: 0.8 seconds

・Electric role release lottery in low frequency support mode Variation time of universal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Win probability: 10%
As a result of being elected, the proportion assigned to the opening of the second type electric role: 100%
・When winning the second class electric opening: Waiting time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times opening/closing door 208b: 1 time Opening time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the present embodiment, the variation time length of the universal figure unit 38 set during the high-frequency support mode is different, so that the game ball launching mechanism 81 continuously launches game balls at 0.6 second intervals. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in the situation. The details will be described below. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds which is the interval between the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 99 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing entrance device 208, and the opening/closing door when the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in this FIG. 99, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds which is set as the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opening state and maintains the opening state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed open/close door 208b during 0.10 seconds until the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state, so it enters the second starting opening 208a. To do. In addition, at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so that the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

Then, when 0.8 seconds has elapsed and the opening/closing door 208b transits to the closed state, the variable display of the suspended universal figure unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 0.2 seconds after the variation display of the universal figure unit 38 is started. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entrance device 208 0.2 seconds after the variation display of the universal figure unit 38 is started. Therefore, when the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 out of the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second starting opening 208a. The relationship will be continued even after the game ball GB4.

The following is a summary of aspects in the case where the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds in the high-frequency support mode described above. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a is set to two.

・High frequency support mode (variation time of universal figure unit 38=0.95 seconds):
Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds after each of the game balls is fired. Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls to be fired = 2/3 / 0.67

FIG. 100 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and the opening/closing door when the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal graphic unit 38 starts. When 0.25 seconds which is set as the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the opening waiting time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opening state and maintains the opening state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 passes through the open/close door 208b in the closed state within 0.30 seconds until the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a because the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, if the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.25 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior is repeated, the description is omitted.

The mode in which the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds in the high frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows.

High frequency support mode (variable time of universal figure unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: Increase/decrease None Ball ejection rate: Number of game balls to be paid out/Number of game balls to be fired = 2/2 = 1.00

101 shows the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entrance device 208, and in the case where the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the third high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the door 208b. In the example shown in this FIG. 101, the game ball has a constant launch intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is 0.6. It is continuously fired at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that enter the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when the game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. 71. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the universal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the opening standby time have elapsed, the opening/closing door 208b transits to the opened state and maintains the opened state for 0.8 seconds. ..

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a because the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening/closing entrance device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, if the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.05 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 Since the behavior is repeated, the description is omitted.

The following is a summary of aspects in the case where the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds in the high-frequency support mode described above.

・High-frequency support mode (variation time of universal figure unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls is increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. The rate of balls discharged: the number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls to be fired = 4/2 / 2.00

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 during the high frequency support mode, it is possible to change the exit rate during the high frequency support mode. That is, by changing the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 during the high frequency support mode, it is possible to increase, maintain, or decrease the number of game balls held by the player.

In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is that the regular jackpot is won, the high-frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. When the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high frequency support mode is won, or when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high frequency support mode, The high frequency support mode ends.

In the present embodiment, after the normal jackpot is won and the high frequency support mode is transitioned to until the high frequency support mode ends, by referring to the variable time table for the high frequency support mode, , The fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the ordinary drawing unit 38 are set. However, even during the period that refers to the variable time table for high frequency support mode, when setting the variable time of the game times that will be won in the jackpot lottery or when setting the variable time of the game times that will reach In this case, the variation time of the special figure unit 37 is set by referring to the jackpot variation time table and the reach generation variation time table.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable time table for the high frequency support mode. 102A shows the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 102B shows the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode.

In the present embodiment, when the high frequency support mode is entered, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is referenced to set the variable time of the special figure unit 37 and the variable figure unit 38. Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the big hit lottery, the small hit is set, and when the small hit is won in the high frequency support mode, the table to be referred to is the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, Switch to the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode. The small hit is a lottery result that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode but the support mode and the lottery mode are not changed.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode includes a special figure unit table A and a general figure unit table A.

In the special figure unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the shift to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

In the universal figure unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variable time of the universal figure unit 38 are stored in association with each other. For reference, FIG. 102(A) shows an increase/decrease in the number of gaming balls when the variation time is set, and a gaming ball entering the second starting opening 208a when the variation time is set. The intervals and are shown.

In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one every 0.6 seconds, and the game balls held by the player increase. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the variation time of the universal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of once every 1.2 seconds, and the game balls held by the player do not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one every 1.8 seconds, and the game balls held by the player decrease.

As shown in FIG. 102(B), the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode includes a special figure unit table B and a general figure unit table B.

In the special figure unit table B, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37.

In the universal figure unit table B, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 are stored in association with each other. For reference, FIG. 102(B) shows an increase/decrease in the number of game balls when the variation time is set, and when the variation time is set, the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a. The intervals and are shown.

In the present embodiment, 0.95 seconds is set as the variation time of the universal figure unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one every 1.8 seconds, and the game balls held by the player decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 0.25 seconds is set as the variation time of the universal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of once every 1.2 seconds, and the game balls held by the player do not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.05 seconds is set as the variation time of the universal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one every 0.6 seconds, and the game balls held by the player increase.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing increase/decrease of the game balls held by the player in the high frequency support mode. FIG. 103(A) shows an example of increase/decrease of game balls when the variable time table set A for high frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103(B) is a variable time table for high frequency support mode. It shows an example of increase and decrease of the game ball when the set B is selected.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Inside, the number of game balls that the player has increases. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the game balls held by the player decrease. In the example shown in FIG. 103(A), the game balls held by the player at the time when the 100 game times have ended are larger than at the start of the high frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 103(B), when the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. In the middle, the number of game balls that the player has is reduced. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), the game balls held by the player at the time when the 100 game times have ended are larger than at the start of the high frequency support mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the shorter the variation time as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period when the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is higher in the high frequency support mode. It is set (FIG. 102). Therefore, the jackpot lottery held by the game balls entering the second starting opening 208a while the special drawing unit 37 is changing can be quickly digested.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variation time of the special drawing unit 37 during the high frequency support mode is set to be longer than the interval of the game balls entering the second starting opening 208a (FIG. 102). .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot lottery from being suspended and impairing the rhythmic feeling of the jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the big hit or the reach is generated as a result of the big hit lottery, a long change time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the change time of the special drawing unit 37. If a long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period when the game ball increases in the high frequency support mode, the period when the game ball increases increases. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win the reach as much as possible during the period when the game balls increase. That is, according to this embodiment, a new value can be added to reach generation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and during the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, the game is played. Player's game balls are reduced. If the small hit is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the game balls held by the player will increase again. Therefore, during the period when the number of game balls decreases, the player wins the small hit and plays the game while expecting to switch the table. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation during the high frequency support mode, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the present embodiment, two types of variable time table sets, A and B, are stored, but the type of variable time table set may be one type, or three or more types. Good.

As another embodiment, during the high frequency support mode, only the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38 may be set by referring to the universal figure unit table A or the universal figure unit table B. With this configuration as well, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

N. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be carried out in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example.

N1. Modification 1:
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the content of the game effect executed in the most recent game time or the effect elements constituting the game effect and executes the previous visual advance notice regardless of the presence or absence of the hold information. In this case, the stored game effect or the contents of the effect elements forming the game effect may be executed in the next game time. With such a configuration, even if there is a new winning in the state where there is no hold information, the game effect or the game effect executed in the previous game time is configured in the game time related to the prize. Since the effect element to be performed is executed, it is possible to execute the game effect having the same content or the effect element configuring the game effect a plurality of times, and to give the player a sense of being seen.

N2. Modification 2:
In the above-described embodiment, when the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element to be executed first may end and the effect element to be executed next may start at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of being seen.

N3. Modification 3:
In the above-described embodiment, after the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestion effect that indicates to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times is executed. However, before the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured to execute a pre-instruction effect that indicates to the player that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player, who has recognized the pre-indication effect, have a strong interest in the effect element to be executed thereafter. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the game effect and the interest can be improved.

N4. Modification 4:
In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the time length for which the open/close doors 208b and 308b are maintained in the open state is different for each type of high frequency support mode. However, instead of this, high frequency support is performed. The number of times the open/close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the open/close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state may be different for each mode type. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high frequency support modes in which the number of game balls entering the second starting opening is different.

N5. Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main control device 60 is configured to be able to execute only one type of the third high frequency support mode as the high frequency support mode in which the ball launch rate exceeds 1, but the main control device 60 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration capable of executing a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the ball launch rate exceeds 1.

For example, in the ninth embodiment, the configuration may be such that the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds can be executed. In the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball has a predetermined launch strength with which the game ball launching mechanism 81 can reach the second starting opening unit 300. In a situation where the balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, all four game balls will enter the second starting opening 308a, and eight game balls will be paid out as prize balls. become. Therefore, the exit rate in the case where the fourth high frequency support mode is executed is 2.00. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of uplifting imparted to the player in the high-frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1. As a result, intonation can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved. Even if the fourth high-frequency support mode can be executed, the above-described first overall rate of departure can be adjusted by adjusting the respective ratios of executing the first to fourth high-frequency support modes. The values of T1 and the second total ball exit rate T2 can be less than 1.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, of the four game balls, one game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are defined as the route R11. Although it is configured to distribute to different routes (route R2 and route R12), instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and two game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1 are concerned. The configuration may be such that it is distributed to a route different from the predetermined route, and one game ball GB1 is distributed to the predetermined route, and a predetermined number of four or more game balls that have arrived after the game ball GB1 are the predetermined route. The route may be divided into a route different from the route. That is, one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a predetermined route, and N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to a route different from the predetermined route. Good.

Further, instead of the through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment, a prize ball entrance or a predetermined ball hole into which a game ball can enter is provided at a position where only one game ball GB1 assigned to the predetermined route can reach. It may be configured to provide an accessory. According to such a configuration, of the (N+1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 reaches the prize ball mouth or a predetermined accessory, and the N game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1. Can be prevented from reaching the prize ball mouth or a predetermined accessory.

Further, at the time of designing the gaming machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to a route different from the predetermined route) to a desired value, a game that reaches the prize ball mouth or a predetermined character The proportion of spheres can be set to a desired proportion. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved, and the game can be diversified.

N7. Modification 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b, the states of the second starting ports 208a and 308a are set to a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball and a state in which it is easy to enter a game ball. Other mechanisms for transitioning between may be adopted. For example, a so-called electric tulip may be adopted as another mechanism instead of the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the above eighth to thirteenth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to other than 100%. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 99%, 60%, or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the ball exit rate in the high frequency support mode. For example, when the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, the probability of winning in the electric accessory release lottery is 100 with respect to the configuration in which the ball discharge rate is 1. If it is set to be less than %, it is possible to make the rate of exit in the high frequency support mode less than 1.

In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting openings 208a and 308a is one or It may be set to any value other than two. With this configuration, the ball exit rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to an arbitrary value. Further, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second starting ports 208a and 308a may be changed according to the game state. According to such a configuration, the exit rate in the high-frequency support mode changes according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

N9. Modification 9:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the type of the high frequency support mode is set for each type of jackpot, but the trigger for executing the high frequency support mode and the type of the high frequency support mode are determined. As the configuration to be performed, any other configuration can be adopted. For example, a configuration that executes a high frequency support mode when the number of consecutive game times that do not win the jackpot lottery exceeds a predetermined number, or a high frequency support mode that corresponds to the number of consecutive game times that does not win the jackpot lottery A configuration that determines the type of the high-frequency support mode, a random number counter to determine whether the high-frequency support mode is executed and the type are provided, and whether the high-frequency support mode is executed or high-frequency support is performed according to the value of the acquired random number counter Configuration that determines the type of mode, depending on the type of stop symbol, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, the configuration that determines the type of high-frequency support mode, high frequency triggered by the execution of a specific reach effect The configuration that executes the support mode, the configuration that determines the type of high-frequency support mode according to the type of reach production that is executed, the number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of holding openings of the starting opening is the upper limit value A configuration that executes the high frequency support mode when the total exceeds a predetermined threshold, high frequency support according to the total number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of holding openings at the starting opening is the upper limit A configuration for determining the mode type can be adopted.

N10. Modification 10:
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, the ball-out rate and the execution rate in each high-frequency support mode are set so that the first total ball-out rate T1 and the second total ball-out rate T2 are less than one. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the ball-out rate and the execution rate in each high-frequency support mode are set so that the first total ball-out rate T1 and the second total ball-out rate T2 become 1. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to increase excessively.

N11. Modification 11:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that gives a big hit when a right is generated, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable is provided with a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the rotation of the reel is started by doing so.

Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

O. Inventions extracted from the above embodiments:
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Characteristic A1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination unit that determines before the special information is the target of the collation,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect element is determined, and
In the effect execution means,
The execution of the decided effect element is started from the game time before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the decided effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content until the game time relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is ended.

According to the feature A1, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of a diveness that the effect elements having the same content have been executed a plurality of times. .. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature A1, even when the effect that directly suggests that the privilege is highly likely to be given (for example, the look-ahead lamp red lighting) is not executed, the effect element having the same content It is possible to realize a game of paying attention to whether or not is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the player can always play with a high sense of expectation for the effect elements to be sequentially executed.

The game effect is executed by outputs from a plurality of hardware such as a speaker, a display device, a light emitting device, and a physically operating accessory provided in the game machine. The above-mentioned effect element refers to a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by the plurality of pieces of hardware that control the game effect. For example, one effect element (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a reach effect, etc.) is configured by the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device performing outputs at predetermined timings. And a game effect is constituted by a plurality of effect elements.

As described above, the effect element is a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by a plurality of hardware that controls the game effect, and thus is configured by, for example, outputs from the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device at a predetermined timing. If the contents of the output from the display device and the light emitting device at the predetermined timing are the same, the effect element A that produces the effect element A and the effect element B in which the output from the speaker is deleted from the effect element have the same effect element. Will be included. When the game machine executes the effect element A and then the effect element B, the game effect B does not include the sound (output from the speaker) for the game effect A, but other hardware. Since the contents of the outputs from the (display device and the light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a feeling of being seen.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine described in Feature A1,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic A2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the expectation of the player can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine described in Feature A2,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the time when the game time relating to the special information which is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the content of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the characteristic A3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the characteristic A4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the characteristic A5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the feature A6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight using various effect elements, it is possible to determine whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means sets at least one effect element by the end of the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. While causing the effect executing means to execute the same content a plurality of times,
In order to cause the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect that indicates to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic B1, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. .. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Furthermore, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. It can convince the player that something has a special meaning.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine described in Feature B1,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature B2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectations can be increased or decreased, and the expectations can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine described in Feature B2,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the time when the game time relating to the special information which is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the content of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature B3, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes the target of the collation. Is something
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, from the game times before the game times related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, the effect execution means executes the plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect element which is an object to be played.

According to the feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual sense from the game times before the game times relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the feature B5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the feature B6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, attention is paid to the player whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various effect elements. Can be made.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Characteristic C1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
Determining means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination unit that determines before the special information is the target of the collation,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs at least two of the plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. In each game time, the effect executing means is caused to execute effect elements of the same content that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times that can be decided by the decision means. A gaming machine to do.

According to the characteristic C1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player feels that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the characteristic C1, the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the same content that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times that can be decided by the decision means. Even when the display durations of the respective game times determined by the means are different, it is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute the same effect element for each game time.

[Characteristic C2]
A gaming machine described in Feature C1,
The control means is
When the length of the display continuation time of one game time for executing the effect element having the same content is such a length that the effect element having the same content can be executed a plurality of times, it is the same in the one game time. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the content of 1.

According to the characteristic C2, it is possible to execute the production element having the same content (hereinafter, also referred to as a presentation element for pre-visualization notice), which is an object to be executed a plurality of times, more times. On the other hand, it is possible to strongly recognize the sense of sight. In addition, the number of times the effect element for pre-visualization notice is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display duration of one game, so that the player's expectation can be changed.

Further, since the presentation element for giving notice of visual sense is an execution element that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined by the determining means, the time required for one execution is 1 It is less than or equal to the display duration of the game time. Therefore, even if the effect element for predicting the visual sense is executed once in one game, the display continuation time may have an extra time. According to this gaming machine, if the length of the display duration of one game is such that the effect element for pre-visualization notice (effect element having the same content) can be executed a plurality of times, Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

[Characteristic C3]
A gaming machine described in Feature C1 or Feature C2,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic C3, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectations can be increased/decreased or the expectations can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Characteristic C4]
A gaming machine described in Feature C3,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the time when the game time relating to the special information which is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the content of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the characteristic C4, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Characteristic C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the characteristic C5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Characteristic C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the feature C6, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Characteristic C7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the characteristic C7, since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, it is possible to determine whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination unit that determines before the special information is the target of the collation,
Production execution means for executing game production,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Production storage means for storing the contents of the game production,
In a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The effect storage unit stores the content of at least a part of the game effect executed in the game time before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition,
The control means is a game time after the game time in which the content of the game effect is stored, and in the game time before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to reproduce the content of at least a part of the stored game effect.

According to the characteristic D1, since the contents of at least a part of the executed game effect are stored and the contents of the stored game effect are reproduced at least a part of the period, the same contents are provided to the player. It is possible to give a feeling of being seen (dejab) that the game effect has been executed multiple times. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is expected in the expectation that the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Every time the game is executed, the player always pays attention to the game production with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately raise the player's attention to the game effects that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the characteristic D1, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, the player will experience the game effect having the completely same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a sense of being seen.

[Characteristic D2]
A gaming machine described in Feature D1, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect including a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation acceptance production as the game production when causing the game production unit to execute the game production stored in the production storage unit.

When reproduced as a game effect, the operation acceptance effect may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the characteristic D2, since the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. It is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that a game effect having the same content has been reproduced, after the stored game effect has been reproduced. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D3, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, so that the player can recognize that the game effect having the same content has been reproduced, and the game effect having the same content is reproduced. It can convince the player that something has a special meaning.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination unit that determines before the special information is the target of the collation,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Determining means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game
The total time of the shortest display continuation times that can be determined by the determining means is calculated as the display continuation time of each of a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. Calculation means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means calculates by the calculating means by the time the game time relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means is caused to execute a plurality of effect elements having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the total time.

According to the characteristic E1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player has a sense of a sense of a sense of a sense of dimple that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

Further, according to the feature E1, the control means sets the effect elements having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time calculated by the calculation means (the total time of the shortest display durations that can be determined by the determination means). Since the effect execution means is caused to execute the plurality of times, the effect element that is the object to be executed a plurality of times is not limited to the one that can be completed within the display continuation time that is the time required for one game time. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For example, it is possible to execute one effect element, which is an object to be executed a plurality of times, over game times. Therefore, when selecting an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to make a selection without considering the execution time of the effect element for one time.

Further, since the effect elements having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times are executed a plurality of times within the shortest total time of the respective display durations that can be determined by the determining means, the effect elements having the same content can be executed a plurality of times. The time required for is less than or equal to the total display duration of the actual game times. Therefore, when a performance element having the same content is executed a plurality of times over a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, it is possible to run out of time. It is possible to avoid and surely execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in the feature E1,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic E2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectations can be increased or decreased, and the expectations can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine described in Feature E2,
The control means executes the plurality of times in the period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the time when the game time relating to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A gaming machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements having the content of "(1)" over time.

According to the feature E3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the characteristic E4, since the operation reception effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the feature E5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the feature E6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, it is possible to determine whether the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
Determining means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs at least one game among the game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times with the same content, a plurality of times within a display duration of the game time.

According to the feature F1, since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. ..
The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.
Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect elements are expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be achieved.

Further, according to the feature F1, at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration of the game time is executed a plurality of times with the same content, so that the player can see that the player has already seen the game. Can be given in one game.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic F2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectations can be increased or decreased, and the expectations can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine described in Feature F2,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and then the predetermined information is determined to be satisfied. A gaming machine, wherein the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the lapse of time in a period until the number of times ends.

According to the feature F3, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of sight increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes the target of the collation. Is something
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, from the game times before the game times related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, the effect execution means executes the plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by starting execution of an effect element which is an object to be played.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of the existing visual sense from the game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the feature F5, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the feature F6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, attention is paid to the player whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various effect elements. Can be made.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Characteristic G1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination unit that determines before the special information is the target of the collation,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Determining means for determining the display duration, which is the time required for one game
In a gaming machine equipped with
The determining means sets a display duration of a predetermined length for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. To secure,
The control means performs the effect elements having the same content in each of at least two game times of a plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized in that it causes a means to execute.

According to the characteristic G1, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content in each of the at least two game times in which the duration of the predetermined length is secured by the determining means. Since the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of dwelling (dejab) that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Characteristic G2]
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two games out of a plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition It secures a display duration of a predetermined length for each time,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect element of the same content that can be executed in each game time in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature G2, the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect elements having the same content that can be executed at each game time in which the determining means secures the display duration of the predetermined length. It is possible to avoid a shortage of time required to execute the same effect element in each game time, and surely execute the effect element having the same content in each game time.

[Characteristic G3]
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
If the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, each of the plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is at least two times. In the game time, the effect execution means for executing the same effect element,
In the determination means, the effect execution means has the same content for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game time according to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by ensuring a display duration of a length capable of executing effect elements.

According to the feature G3, the determining means secures the display duration time of a length that allows the effect executing means to execute the effect elements having the same content, and therefore the time required for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element. It is possible to avoid running out in each game time, and surely execute the effect elements of the same content in each game time.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic G4, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, and the expectation of the player can be suppressed. Can be changed.

[Characteristic G5]
A gaming machine described in Feature G4,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from the time when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to the time when the game time relating to the special information which is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the content of is increased with the passage of time.

According to the feature G5, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the existing sensation increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Characteristic G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, further comprising:
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the feature G6, since the operation reception effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a certain sense of sight.

[Characteristic G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the feature G7, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, the player can be made aware that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Characteristic G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the feature G8, since it is possible to give the player a sense of dawn using various effect elements, it is possible to determine whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Time acquisition means for acquiring time information,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
As the effect element, for causing the effect execution means to execute a time-linked effect element that is continuously executed over time based on the time information.
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the time-linked effect element is started by the time the game time relating to the special information determined to be satisfied with the predetermined condition is completed. In this case, a plurality of the time-linked effect elements executed in at least a part of the effect execution means in the effect execution means by the end of the game time relating to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by being executed once.

According to the feature H1, since the time-linked effect element that is executed at least in a part of the period is executed multiple times, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a new interest. In addition, since the time-linked effect element executed at least in a part of the period is executed multiple times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times (dejab). Can be given.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element has been executed multiple times, the time-linked effect element is executed in the expectation that the time effect element is executed multiple times. Every time, I always pay attention to the time-linked effect elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and appropriately increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, The interest of the game can be improved.

If a plurality of gaming machines equipped with the feature H1 are installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machines that satisfy the predetermined condition and the gaming machines that do not satisfy the predetermined condition start from the same time and have the same time-linked effect element. Even when is started, a time difference (deviation) occurs in the time-linked effect elements to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of superiority to a player who is playing a game on a gaming machine that satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Characteristic H2]
A gaming machine described in the feature H1,
The control means sets a specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined time length as a start position when the effect-executed element executes the time-linked effect element a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature H2, the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times with the specific temporal position as the start position, so that the player is strongly aware of the portion of the time-linked effect element after the specific temporal position. The visual sense can be recognized.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes the target of the collation. Is something
The control means is a game time to be executed after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game time before the game time according to the special information is determined to be satisfied. A game is characterized by causing the performance executing means to execute the time-interlocking effect element with the timing of starting at least two game times as a trigger, with the specific temporal position as a start position. Machine.

According to the feature H3, by synchronizing the start timing of each time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times with the start timing of the game times, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature 3,
The control means stores, as the specific temporal position, the temporal position of the time-linked effect element executed at the timing when the game time is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being.

If a specific temporal position is set at the end of the time-linked effect element, and if the time-linked effect element is started from the specific time position, the time-linked effect element corresponding to the specific temporal position is , The game may not be executed at the timing of the start of the first game of at least two game times. In this case, the time-linked effect element that was being executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game time is started suddenly cuts off at the timing of the start of the first game time, and is also executed once. The time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific time position that is not set.

According to the feature H4, the time-linked effect executed at the timing at which the game times after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, in other words, the first game times of the at least two game times are started. The temporal position of the element is stored as the specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position is set as the start position of the time-linked effect element for the second time and later of the multiple executions. A temporal position that has been executed once as a continuous series of flows can be set as a start position of the time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times after the second time. Therefore, the time-linked effect elements, which were executed as a continuous series until the first game time was started, are prevented from being suddenly interrupted at the timing of the start of the first game time, and are also executed once. It is possible to prevent the time-linked effect element from being started and executed from a specific time position that is not set.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to further cause the effect executing means to execute a non-time-interlocking effect element that is executed without being based on the time information.
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the non-time-interlocking effect element is executed together with the time-interlocking effect element, the time-interlocking effect executed in at least a part of the period. An element and the non-time-interlocking effect element are configured to cause the effect executing means to execute a plurality of times until the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is ended. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-linked effect element, the non-time-related effect element is executed a plurality of times, so that a stronger sense of sight can be given to the player.

[Characteristic H6]
A gaming machine according to feature H5,
The game machine, wherein the control means controls the number of the non-time-interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature 6, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectations can be increased or decreased, and the expectations can be suppressed. You can make a difference.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to feature H6,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game time relating to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is ended. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements with the passage of time.

According to the feature H7, the number of non-time-interlocking effect elements, which are one of the effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of sight, increases with time, so the player's expectation with time. Can be increased.

[Feature H8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7,
Equipped with operation acceptance means for accepting input operation by the player,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time-interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

According to the characteristic H8, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time-interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player, and to play the game. It is possible to surely give the person a sense of sight.

[Characteristic H9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8,
The control means performs a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A game machine characterized by being executed by.

According to the characteristic H9, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, the player can be made aware that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

[Characteristic H10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9,
The effect element is a cut-in notice effect that causes a predetermined image to be displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect that causes a predetermined object image to be displayed in front of the background image, and the background image to change from a normal mode. Background change notice effect, character effect notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row variation effect that changes the symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect that changes the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one activated line, and a symbol stop effect that stops a predetermined combination of symbols. A game machine characterized by being included.

According to the characteristic H10, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight using various effect elements, it is possible to determine whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic I1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, it causes the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution unit, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution unit,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode is set to the above-described second effect mode regardless of whether the operation condition satisfies the operation condition or not. Cause the performance execution means to execute,
When the second effect mode is not executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
Even after the operation mode satisfies the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is set to the above-mentioned second effect mode. An amusement machine characterized by being not allowed to be executed by a performance executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the characteristic I1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second operation acceptance effect element is used in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. When the second effect mode is not executed in the operation acceptance effect element of the first time, the second effect mode is not executed in the operation acceptance effect elements of the second time and thereafter, Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed at the first time and after the second time can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution effect element executes the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the effect effect effect means executes the first effect mode. After that, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution effect element executes the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the effect effect effect means executes the first effect mode. After that, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means upon the elapse of the predetermined time. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the characteristic I2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. .. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature I3, when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising:
A change means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode,
Controlling the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic I4, the mode of the operation receiving means changes, so that it is possible to give the game an unexpected effect. Further, it is possible to convince that the second effect mode is executed even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Characteristic I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature I5, execution of the effect element, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be a target for collation. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the feeling of being seen.

[Characteristic I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature I6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to let the player recognize that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic J1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, it causes the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is set. To cause the performance executing means to execute,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode is set to the above-described second effect mode regardless of whether the operation condition satisfies the operation condition or not. Cause the performance execution means to execute,
When the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
Even after the operation mode satisfies the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the third effect mode is set to the above-mentioned third effect mode. An amusement machine characterized by being caused to be executed by a performance executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature J1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second operation accepting effect element and the second operation acceptance effect element are executed. When the third effect aspect is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the third effect aspect is executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed after the first time and after the second time can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Characteristic J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means upon the elapse of the predetermined time.
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution effect element executes the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the effect effect effect means executes the first effect mode. After that, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution effect element executes the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the effect effect effect means executes the first effect mode. After that, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time period, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means upon the elapse of the predetermined time period,
In the case where the third performance mode is executed when the performance execution means is caused to execute the first operation acceptance performance element, the performance execution means is caused to execute the first performance mode. After that, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the third effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition,
In the case where the third performance mode is executed when the performance execution means is caused to execute the first operation acceptance performance element, the performance execution means is caused to execute the first performance mode. After that, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect execution means is caused to execute the third effect mode upon the elapse of the predetermined time. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third operation mode is triggered when the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. be able to. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed, so that the game is provided with an unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Characteristic J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means when the effect receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Characteristic J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, further comprising:
A change means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode,
Controlling the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Amusement machine.

According to the feature J4, since the mode of the operation accepting means changes, it is possible to give the game a surprise, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition, It is possible to give persuasiveness to the execution of the second rendering mode.

[Characteristic J5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature J5, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, so that a plurality of game times are performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the sense of being seen.
[Characteristic J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature J6, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Characteristic K group>
The characteristic K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic K1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. In either case of satisfying or not satisfying, the effect execution means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the characteristic K1, the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, so that the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times. Even in this case, the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed after the first time and after the second time can be the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Characteristic K2]
A gaming machine described in the feature K1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time period, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time period has elapsed. And a gaming machine.

According to the characteristic K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. .. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic K3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1 or the characteristic K2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the characteristic K3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means when the effect receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Characteristic K4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, further comprising:
A change means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
In the case where the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode,
Controlling the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic K4, since the mode of the operation accepting means changes, it is possible to give the game a surprise, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. It is possible to give persuasiveness to the execution of the second rendering mode.

[Characteristic K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature K5, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the sense of being seen.
[Characteristic K6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the characteristic K6, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, the player can be made aware that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
A selection screen including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, and allowing the player to select one option from a plurality of options, the operation of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means. While displaying a selection screen in which the selection state is switched every time the mode satisfies a predetermined operation condition,
The effect execution means is caused to execute the effect mode corresponding to the option selected at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
While displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed at the first time on the performance executing means,
A game machine characterized in that, at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect execution means is caused to execute the same effect mode as the effect mode corresponding to the option selected the first time.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation acceptance effect element executed after the second time, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element is achieved. Since it is executed, even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed after the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The game machine characterized in that the selection screen has the same form before and after the selection state is switched.

According to the feature L2, when the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the selection screen of the same mode, so that the player is given a stronger sense of being seen. You can

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature L3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means when the effect receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature L4, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is a target for the collation, so that a plurality of game times are performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the feeling of being seen.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature L5, since the production effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestion production, the player can be made aware that the production element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the production element having the same content is performed. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
A selection screen that includes a content that suggests acceptance of the input operation by the player, and that allows the player to select one performance mode from a plurality of performance modes, in which the selection state switches over time. Is displayed on the effect executing means,
Regardless of whether the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation acceptance means satisfies a predetermined operation condition or not, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. In the state in which the effect is performed, the effect execution means is caused to execute the selected effect mode,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
While displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed at the first time on the performance executing means,
Regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected, and the selected effect is selected. A game machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a mode.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the same operation mode as the operation mode executed in the first operation reception effect element in the operation reception effect elements executed after the second time. Since they are selected and executed, the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed after the first time and the second time and thereafter can be made the same even when the operation acceptance effect elements are executed a plurality of times. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one performance mode is selected from the plurality of performance modes when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. ,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, one performance mode is selected from the plurality of performance modes upon the elapse of the predetermined time. And
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time and thereafter,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the first effect mode selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition is selected. State,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the first effect mode selected when the predetermined time elapses is selected. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing.

According to the feature M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. Since the player is in the selected state, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of effect modes is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Can be selected.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1 or the feature M2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to perceive the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature M3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means when the effect receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature M4, execution of the effect element, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is a target for the collation, so that a plurality of game times are performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the feeling of being seen.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature M5, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the effect effect, the player can be made aware that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Feature N group>
The characteristic N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic N1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
Executing a first effect mode in which the effect execution unit causes the effect execution unit to display a predetermined parameter that includes a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and changes in a certain direction over time. Let
A gaming machine, characterized in that, after the parameter satisfies a predetermined parameter condition, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameter satisfies the predetermined parameter condition regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed after the first time and after the second time can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

The player who recognizes the sense of sight has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected to be executed a plurality of times in the hope that the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, we will always pay attention to the directing elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect elements having the same content are executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the effect elements that are sequentially executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Characteristic N2]
The gaming machine described in the feature N1,
The control means, when the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, causes the effect executing means to execute a speed changing process for changing a changing speed of the parameter. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature N2, the player operates the operation receiving means so that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies the predetermined operation condition in an attempt to change the changing speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to the feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the direction of decreasing with the passage of time, the more the number of the input operations received by the operation receiving means per unit time is, the smaller the decreasing rate of the parameter becomes. In the gaming machine, the performance changing means is caused to execute the speed changing process.

According to the characteristic N3, the player operates the operation accepting means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time, in order to reduce the decreasing speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to the feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the direction of increasing with the passage of time, the increasing speed of the parameter increases as the number of the input operations received by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. In the gaming machine, the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means.

According to the characteristic N4, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in order to increase the increasing speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The control means is
The process of changing the parameter is stored when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and
A game machine characterized by causing the performance executing means to reproduce the process in which the stored parameter changes when the performance executing means executes the operation acceptance performance elements after the second time.

According to the feature N5, the process of changing the parameters is the same in the operation acceptance effect element that is executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of being seen.

[Characteristic N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5,
A change means for changing the mode of the operation accepting means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
When causing the performance executing means to execute the first operation acceptance performance element, the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means when the input operation is accepted is stored,
When the operation execution performance element for the second time and thereafter is executed by the performance execution means, the changing means reproduces the stored process of changing the mode of the operation reception means. Machine.

According to the feature N6, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to give the game an unexpectedness. Furthermore, since the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means in the operation acceptance effect element of the first time is reproduced in the operation acceptance effect elements of the second time and thereafter, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature N7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature N7, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the feeling of being seen.

[Feature N8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7,
The control means, after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the feature N8, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is generated. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning that it has been executed multiple times.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, it causes the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution unit, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution unit,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, or the second effect mode has been applied once in all of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. If not executed,
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a suggestion effect that indicates to a player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the characteristic O1, when the player performs the same input operation for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content. It is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the effect element of (3) has been executed multiple times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, so that the player is informed that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, it is possible to convince the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, if the player experiences the suggestive effect after the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, expecting that the suggestive effect is executed, each time the operation accepting effect element is executed, By performing the same input operation, the operation accepting means is operated so that the operation accepting effect mode is executed with the same content, and it is expected that the suggestive effect is generated. Therefore, the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic O2]
A gaming machine described in feature O1,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control unit executes the second effect mode to the effect execution unit on the occasion that the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine described in the feature O1 or the feature O2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature O3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Characteristic O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the characteristic O4, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the feeling of being seen.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Characteristic P1]
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
Information included in the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit, and a collation unit that collates whether or not the predetermined privilege-giving information matches,
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information for each game,
As a result of the collation of the special information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player when the information included in the special information and the privilege granting information match,
Based on at least one of the information included in the special information, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Production execution means for executing game production composed of production elements,
Control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Operation accepting means for accepting an input operation by a player,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is set in the effect executing means by the time the game time relating to the special information, which is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, is completed. To run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, it causes the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect effecting means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes. To cause the performance executing means to execute,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, or the third effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. in case of,
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a suggestion effect that indicates to a player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the characteristic P1, when the player performs the same input operation on each of the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect elements with the same content are executed a plurality of times, and the same content. It is possible to give the player a sense of being already seen (dejab) that the effect element of (3) has been executed multiple times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggestion effect, so that the player is informed that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, it is possible to convince the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive effect after the operation accepting effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, each time the operation accepting effect element is executed, expecting that the suggestive effect is executed, By performing the same input operation, the operation accepting means is operated so that the operation accepting effect mode is executed with the same content, and it is expected that the suggestive effect is generated.
Therefore, the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed can be appropriately increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic P2]
A gaming machine described in Feature P1,
The control means is
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means upon the elapse of the predetermined time. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered when the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be positively involved in the operation acceptance performance element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode can be executed triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. .. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that the game can be provided with an unexpectedness, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The control means is
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance performance element is selected as the performance element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time period in which the input operation can be accepted. Characteristic gaming machine.

The player may perform an input operation at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed multiple times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect executing means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation accepting effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, it may be difficult for the player to feel a sense of sight of the operation acceptance performance element executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature P3, when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in seeing the player. You can

[Characteristic P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information becomes a target of the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs the effect execution means before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation. In the gaming machine, the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the feature P4, the execution of the effect element, which is the target to be executed a plurality of times, is started before the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, so that a plurality of game times are performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the sense of being seen.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Characteristic Q1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a in the eighth embodiment, second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the game ball that has been shot can enter,
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which a game ball that has been shot can pass,
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an open/close door 208b in the eighth embodiment, an open/close door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for making a transition between the second state and the second state,
Distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of paths (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment),
A first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 in the eighth embodiment, route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
While allocating the game ball that arrived to the first route,
The game balls that arrive after the game balls that are distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second route is distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature Q1, the game ball assigned to the first path (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In some cases, it becomes possible to enter the ball entering part. On the other hand, the game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so that it cannot pass through the passage portion and the ball enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball entering part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entering portion. Whether or not the first and second game balls respectively reach the ball-in portion depends on whether or not the ball-in portion is in the second state. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passage part is set to one, and the game is entered into the ball entrance part. Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entering portion, it is possible to diversify the game.

For example, the time length for which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state after the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entrance portion transitions from the first state to the second state, When the timing at which the ball entering portion changes from the first state to the second state is controlled to be different for each mode, the ball entering portion of the first and second game balls Since the number of game balls entering the game can be different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Characteristic Q2]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q1,
A lottery executing means (a process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) which executes a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passage portion,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (processing shown in FIGS. 76, 77 and 83),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature Q2, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed the passing portion. Since the second game sphere does not pass through the passage portion, the control means controls the first and second game spheres in a situation where the game sphere is continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval. Whether the state of the ball entering portion at the timing when each arrives at the ball entering portion is set to the first state or the second state, that is, each of the first and second game balls is set to the ball entering portion. Whether or not to enter the ball is determined by the result of the lottery executed when the first game ball has passed the passing portion and the control mode of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (the first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) enters the ball entering portion. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the passing portion.

[Characteristic Q3]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2,
The control unit has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition unit (first and second high frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, first to third high frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment). And
For each control mode, after the game ball has passed through the passing part, the time length for which the ball entering part maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state. The time length until the ball entrance unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entrance unit transitions from the first state to the second state, At least one of the timings at which the ball entering portion makes a transition from the first state to the second state is different.

According to the feature Q3, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) can be made different for each control mode. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Characteristic Q4]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2 or the feature Q3,
Display means (universal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage unit until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passage unit is displayed by the display means,
The gaming machine is set to a time shorter than a time from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to when the game ball reaches the ball entering unit.

According to the feature Q4, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the first game ball, which has passed the passing part and triggered the lottery, reaches the entry part. .. Since the control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed the passing part and triggered the lottery is the entry part. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing part reaches the ball entering part and the ball entering part is in the second state.

[Characteristic Q5]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q4,
After the game ball has passed through the passing unit, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing unit is displayed by the display means, and the ball entering unit is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
The gaming machine is set to a time shorter than a time from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to when the game ball reaches the ball entering unit.

According to the feature Q5, the control means can realize the control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing part reaches the ball entering part and the ball entering part is in the second state. Become.

[Characteristic Q6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, the game balls that have been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion reach the ball entrance portion. At the timing, the ball entering portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion, the ball entering portion is in the first state. Control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, the game balls that have been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion reach the ball entrance portion. At the timing, the ball entering portion is in the second state, and at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion, the ball entering portion is in the second state. Control mode (second high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the ball entering portion, but the second game ball does not enter the ball entering portion, the first control mode, the first game ball and the second game ball. Since the second control mode in which both of the game balls enter the ball entering portion can be realized, intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic Q7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q5,
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
The N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that have arrived after the game balls assigned to the first route are assigned to the second route (routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first path.

According to the feature Q7, one game ball is distributed to the first route, and N game balls are distributed to the second route, so each of the (N+1) game balls is entered. The control as to whether or not to enter the part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing part. As a result, games can be diversified. For example, if the number of game balls entering the ball entry part of the (N+1) game balls is made different for each control mode, various controls in which the number of game balls entering the ball entry part are different It is possible to realize the mode.

[Characteristic Q8]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q7,
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage portion,
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery,
Equipped with
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. The incoming ball portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the section, and the incoming ball portion is the above-mentioned at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the incoming ball portion. A first control mode in a first state (first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment),
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. When the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion. In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entering portion is in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature Q8, the first game ball enters the ball entry part, but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry part, and the first game ball enters the ball entry part. At least one of the N game balls that enters the ball can realize the second control mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering portion, so that intonation can be added to the game, The interest in can be improved.

[Characteristic Q9]
A gaming machine according to feature Q7 or feature Q8,
The second route is composed of N routes (routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means has an alternative distribution mechanism (first alternative distribution mechanism 304 and second alternative distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game balls to one of the two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to the feature Q9, the function of allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first path and the function of allocating the N game balls that have arrived after the game ball that is allocated to the first path to the second path are electronic. It can be realized by a simple structure as compared with a structure realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, a game ball using a structure or the like that counts the number of game balls that have arrived using a counter or the like and is driven by an electric force A configuration for allocating can be given.

[Characteristic Q10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q9,
A third route (route R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball of the plurality of game balls that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is the second route (route R12 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route in the example 4 of FIG. 84). R12 and route R112),
At least one game ball of a plurality of game balls that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the third route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball assigned to the second route and the game ball assigned to the third route is assigned to the first route,
The third route is configured such that the allocated game balls cannot enter the ball entering part even when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic Q10, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured such that the game balls cannot enter the ball entering portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be reduced.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball-in portion (second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which a game ball that has been shot can enter,
Execution means (main controller 60) for executing a ball entry assist mode (high frequency support mode) for assisting entry of a game ball into the ball entry section,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering section.
A gaming machine comprising:
The ratio of the number of paid game balls to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch strength by the launching means is defined as a ball launch rate. If you do
The execution means is
N types (n is an integer of 2 or more) having different exit rates can be executed, and
As one of the n types of entry assistance modes, at least the game ball reduction mode in which the exit rate is less than 1 (first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment), and the exit rate It is possible to execute a game ball increase mode exceeding 1 (third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment),
The exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assist mode is executed is defined as Mi,
When the ratio of the i-th entry assist mode executed in the entry assist mode is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to satisfy.

According to the feature R1, although the game ball increase mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1 is executable as one mode of the entry assist mode, the total exit in the case where the entry assist mode is executed Since the ratio is less than 1, it is possible to give the player a feeling of uplifting in the game ball increasing mode, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to increase excessively. As a result, the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of game ball increasing modes (third high frequency support mode and fourth high frequency support mode in modification example 5) of which the payout rate is different, ..

According to the characteristic R2, a plurality of types of game ball increasing modes with different ball exit rates can be executed, and thus the degree of uplifting given to the player in the game ball increasing mode can be made different. As a result, intonation can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the game ball shot can pass,
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an opening/closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
A lottery executing means (a process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) which executes a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passage portion,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83),
Distribution means (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of paths,
It is possible that the allocated game balls can pass through the passage part and that the game ball can enter the ball entrance part when the ball entrance part is in the second state. A first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured in
As it is impossible for the allocated game balls to pass through the passing part, and when the ball entering part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball entering part. A second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured as described above,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that arrived to the first route,
Allocating N game balls that have arrived after the game balls assigned to the first route to the second route,
It is configured to distribute one game ball that arrives after the N game balls allocated to the second route to the first path,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, the game ball increasing mode, by executing one control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means Is a mode that is realized,
The gaming machine reduction mode is a mode realized by executing another control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means.

According to the characteristic R3, one game ball assigned to the first route (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the entering ball portion is the second. In the state of, it becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, so that they cannot pass through the passing portion and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In this case, it becomes possible to enter the ball entering portion. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and the first game ball and the N game balls respectively. Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion is determined by determining whether the first game ball or each of the N game balls reaches the ball entering portion. It will depend on whether it is in a state or not.

Since the N game balls that have reached after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval. , Whether the state of the ball entering portion at the timing when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the ball entering portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game ball and each of the N game balls is inserted into the ball entering portion is executed with the passage of the first game ball through the passing portion as a trigger. It is determined according to the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control as to whether or not each of the (N+1) game balls is to be entered in the ball entry part is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed the passage part. It can be realized by a series of controls.

Further, according to the characteristic R3, the time length for which the ball entering portion maintains the second state after the transition from the first state to the second state, and the ball entering portion is changed from the first state to the second state. When the number of transitions to the state, the timing at which the ball entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, and the like are controlled to be different for each control mode, (N+1) game balls Since the number of game balls that enter the ball-in part can be different for each control mode, the exit rate in each control mode can be set to different values.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to feature R3,
The control means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. The incoming ball portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the section, and the incoming ball portion is the above-mentioned at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the incoming ball portion. A first control mode in a first state (first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment),
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. When the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion. In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entering portion is in the second state,
Have
The game ball increasing mode is a mode realized by executing the second control mode by the control means,
The gaming machine reduction mode is a mode realized by the control unit executing the first control mode.

According to the feature R4, the first game ball enters the ball entry part, but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry part. A game ball decrease mode in which the first game ball does not enter the ball entry part, and the first game ball enters the ball entry part. Since at least one game ball out of the N game balls can be realized in the game ball increasing mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering portion, intonation can be added to the game, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. It is possible to improve.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81),
Distribution means (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of paths,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that have arrived after the game balls assigned to the first route are the second routes that are different from the first route (the route in the ninth embodiment). R2 and route R12),
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first path.

According to the feature S1, of the (N+1) game balls, one game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a first game ball) is distributed to the first path, and the N which arrives after the first game ball is reached. Since the individual game balls can be distributed to the second route, by effectively utilizing the first route and the second route, the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

For example, in a case where a ball entry portion into which the game ball can enter and a predetermined accessory are provided at a position where only the first game ball assigned to the first path can reach, (N+1) Of the game balls, only the first game ball reaches the entrance portion or the predetermined character, and the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball become the ball input part or the predetermined character. It becomes possible not to reach. Further, at the time of designing the game machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls allocated to the second route) to a desired value, the ratio of the game balls that reach the entrance portion or a predetermined accessory is determined. It can be set to a desired ratio. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved, and the game can be diversified.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
It is provided with a passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which a game ball can pass,
The first route is configured such that the game balls assigned to the first route can pass through the passing portion,
The game machine characterized in that the second route is configured such that the game balls assigned to the second route cannot pass through the passing portion.

According to the feature S2, only the first game ball of the (N+1) game balls can pass through the passing portion. Therefore, when the predetermined process is executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion, the predetermined process is performed every time the (N+1) game balls reach the sorting means. It can be executed at a rate of once.

For example, in the case where the predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion, the predetermined lottery is 1 every time (N+1) game balls reach the sorting means. It will be executed at a rate of once. Further, when the gaming machine is designed, the value of N (the number of gaming balls assigned to the second route) is set to a desired value, thereby setting the frequency with which the predetermined lottery is executed to the desired frequency. be able to. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved, and the game can be diversified.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine described in the feature S2,
A ball-in portion (second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which a game ball that has been shot can enter,
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an opening/closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
Equipped with
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature S3, the first game ball assigned to the first path can pass through the passing portion, and when the ball entering portion is in the second state, the ball entering portion. It becomes possible to enter. On the other hand, the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, so that they cannot pass through the passing portion and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In this case, it becomes possible to enter the ball entering portion. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and the first game ball and the N game balls respectively. Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion is determined by determining whether the first game ball or each of the N game balls reaches the ball entering portion. It will depend on whether it is in a state or not. Therefore, of the (N+1) game balls, the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is set to one, and the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion is set to the state of the ball entering portion. Since it can be changed depending on each other, it is possible to diversify the game.

For example, the time length for which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state after the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entrance portion transitions from the first state to the second state, When it is configured to control the timing at which the ball entering portion changes from the first state to the second state so as to be different for each mode, in the ball entering portion of the (N+1) game balls, Since the number of game balls to enter can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine described in feature S3,
A lottery executing means (a process shown in step S4509 of FIG. 76) which executes a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passage portion,
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature S4, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed the passing portion. Since the N game balls that have reached after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval. , The first game ball and the N game balls each of the game ball to reach the ball entering portion, the state of the ball entering portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game ball and each of the N game balls is inserted into the ball entering portion is executed with the passage of the first game ball through the passing portion as a trigger. It is determined according to the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control as to whether or not each of the (N+1) game balls is to be entered in the ball entry part is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed the passage part. It can be realized by a series of controls.

[Feature S5]
The gaming machine according to feature S4,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means,
For each control mode, after the game ball has passed through the passing part, the time length for which the ball entering part maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state. The time length until the ball entrance unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entrance unit transitions from the first state to the second state, At least one of the timings at which the ball entering portion makes a transition from the first state to the second state is different.

According to the feature S5, since the number of game balls entering the ball-in portion of the (N+1) game balls can be made different for each control mode, diversification of the game can be achieved. it can.

[Feature S6]
The gaming machine according to feature S5,
Display means (universal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage unit until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passage unit is displayed by the display means,
The gaming machine is set to a time shorter than a time from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to when the game ball reaches the ball entering unit.

According to the feature S6, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entry portion. .. Since the control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed the passing part and triggered the lottery is the entry part. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passing part reaches the ball entering part and the ball entering part is in the second state.

[Feature S7]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
After the game ball has passed through the passing unit, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing unit is displayed by the display means, and the ball entering unit is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
The gaming machine is set to a time shorter than a time from when the game ball passes through the passing unit to when the game ball reaches the ball entering unit.

According to the characteristic S7, the control means can realize the control mode in which the first game ball passing through the passing part reaches the ball entering part and the ball entering part is in the second state. Become.

[Feature S8]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. The incoming ball portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the section, and the incoming ball portion is the above-mentioned at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the incoming ball portion. A first control mode in a first state (first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment),
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passing portion is the ball entering the ball. When the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball entering portion. In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entering portion is in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature S8, the first game ball enters the ball entry part, but N game balls do not enter the ball entry part, and the first game ball enters the ball entry part. At least one of the N game balls that enters the ball can realize the second control mode in which the game ball enters the ball entering portion, so that intonation can be added to the game, The interest in can be improved.

[Feature S9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S8,
The second route is composed of a plurality of routes (routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means has an alternative distribution mechanism (first alternative distribution mechanism 304 and second alternative distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game balls to one of the two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to the feature S9, the function of allocating one arrived game ball to the first path and allocating the N game balls arrived after the game ball allocated to the first path to the second path is electronic. It can be realized by a simple structure as compared with a structure realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, a game ball using a structure or the like that counts the number of game balls that have arrived using a counter or the like and is driven by an electric force A configuration for allocating can be given.

[Characteristic S10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S9,
A third route (route R2 in Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R111 in Example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least N game balls of the plurality of game balls that have arrived after the game balls that are distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (route R12 and route R112 in Example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball of a plurality of game balls that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the third route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball assigned to the second route and the game ball assigned to the third route is assigned to the first route,
The third route is configured such that the allocated game balls cannot enter the ball entering part even when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature S10, since the sorted game balls are provided with the third path configured such that it cannot enter the ball entering portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be reduced.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 208a in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass,
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition unit (opening/closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The control means is
Based on the game state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric accessory release lottery and the type of support mode),
A transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the ball entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (normally in the tenth embodiment). It is possible to set the length of the fluctuation time of the figure unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity and at a predetermined interval, a predetermined time (1.2 times after the game ball GB1 passed through the through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment). The game machine characterized in that the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion per second (FIG. 87, FIG. 89) varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

According to the characteristic T1, since the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, according to the characteristic T1, for example, even when the time during which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to the feature T1,
A lottery executing means (a process shown in step S5109 of FIG. 91) which executes a lottery when a game ball has passed through the passage portion,
Display means (universal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
Equipped with
The control means is
Based on the gaming state (result of the electric accessory release lottery in the tenth embodiment),
Time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until when the ball entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the opening/closing door 208b is opened). The length of the waiting time) can be set to multiple types of lengths.

According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball has passed through the passage portion. And the time from the time when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to the time when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open/close door 208b). Waiting time for release) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature T2, when the time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38) from when the game ball passes through the passage portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means is set to the same length. Even if there is, a plurality of types of time (opening waiting time of the open/close door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state By setting the length, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b). By changing the, it is possible to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b), and change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion. You can

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The ball-in portion is configured so that the game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter in the second state,
The control means is
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage unit until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passage unit is displayed by the display means (variation of the universal figure unit 38). Time,
The game ball is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the ball entrance part after passing through the passage part.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature T3, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entry portion. As a result, the control means, after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, and before the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery reaches the entrance portion, the entry portion It is possible to execute the control for starting the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, enter the game ball that triggered the transition of the ball entering portion to the second state (the game ball that passed the passing portion and triggered the lottery) into the ball entering portion that transitioned to the second state. It becomes possible.

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The ball entering section is configured such that the game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the ball entering section when the ball entering section is in the second state,
The control means is
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until when the ball entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the normal state). First, the variation time of the figure unit 38 + the waiting time for opening and closing the opening/closing door 208b) is set to a time shorter than the time from the passage of the game ball to the passage portion to the arrival of the game ball. Control of
The transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until when the ball entering portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the normal state). Second time of setting the variation time of the figure unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a time longer than the time from the passage of the game ball to the passage portion to the arrival of the game ball. Control of
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, since the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion, the ball entering portion makes a transition to the second state. When the second control is executed, the game ball that has passed through passes the game ball that has passed through the passing part to the ball entering part. Since the state has not transitioned to the state of 2, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion does not enter the entering portion. That is, according to the feature T4, since the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation to the game and improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be planned.

[Feature T5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
A distribution means (alternating distribution mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of paths,
A first route (route R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
While allocating the game ball that arrived to the first route,
The game balls that arrive after the game balls that are distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second route is distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

According to the feature T5, the game ball assigned to the first path (hereinafter, also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In some cases, it becomes possible to enter the ball entering part. On the other hand, the game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so that it cannot pass through the passage portion and the ball enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball entering part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entering portion. Whether or not the first and second game balls respectively reach the ball-in portion depends on whether or not the ball-in portion is in the second state. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passage part is set to one, and the game is entered into the ball entrance part. The number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entrance portion. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not to insert each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) into the ball entering portion. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the passing portion.

Further, according to the feature T5, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first game ball passes through the passing portion, so that, for example, two game balls (first Both the 1st game ball and the 2nd game ball) are set to a transition start waiting time when the ball enters the ball entrance portion (control in the case of winning the first type electric role release in the tenth embodiment). (FIG. 87)) Of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), only the second game ball is set to the transition start waiting time at which the second ball will enter the ball entering portion. It is possible to perform the control (control in the case of winning the second type electric role opening in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89 )). That is, according to the feature T5, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion, so that intonation can be added to the game. The interest of the game can be improved.
[Feature T6]
A gaming machine described in feature T5,
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
The N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that have arrived after the game balls assigned to the first route are assigned to the second route (routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first path.

According to the feature T6, one game ball is distributed to the first route and N game balls are distributed to the second route, so that each of the (N+1) game balls is entered. The control as to whether or not to enter the part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing part. Further, according to the feature T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths when the first gaming ball has passed the passing portion. That is, according to the feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion of the (N+1) game balls. Inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T7]
A gaming machine described in feature T6,
The second route is composed of N routes (routes R2 and R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means has an alternative distribution mechanism (first alternative distribution mechanism 304 and second alternative distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes the game balls to one of the two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to the feature T7, the function of allocating the reached one game ball to the first path and the function of allocating the N game balls arrived after the game ball allocated to the first path to the second path are It can be realized by a simple structure as compared with a structure realized by using control or the like. As a configuration for realizing the function using electronic control or the like, for example, a game ball using a structure or the like that counts the number of game balls that have arrived using a counter or the like and is driven by an electric force A configuration for allocating can be given.

[Feature T8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features T5 to T7,
A third route (route R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The distribution means,
While allocating the one game ball that has arrived to the first route (route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball of the plurality of game balls that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is the second route (route R12 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route in the example 4 of FIG. 84). R12 and route R112),
At least one game ball of a plurality of game balls that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the third route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball assigned to the second route and the game ball assigned to the third route is assigned to the first route,
The third route is configured such that the allocated game balls cannot enter the ball entering part even when the ball entering part is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic T8, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured such that the game balls cannot enter the ball entering portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be reduced.

<Feature U group>
The characteristic U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition unit (opening/closing door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering section.
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass,
A lottery executing means for executing a lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion,
Display means for starting the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing portion, and for ending the variable display and stopping the display of the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means. (Public unit 38),
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch strength by the launching means is defined as a ball launch rate. In case of
The control means is
It has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
Transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display until when the ball entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (universal figure unit in the eleventh embodiment) By setting the variable time of 38+the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the rate of ball launch is less than 1;
A second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the rate of exit is 1;
A third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the characteristic U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball-out rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1, and the ball-out rate is 1 Since it is possible to execute a third control mode that exceeds the above, it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the characteristic U1, for example, even when the time during which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to two paths,
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The alternate sorting means,
While allocating the one game ball that arrived to the first route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
It is configured to distribute one game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second route to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. Is configured,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching device at a predetermined launch intensity and at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The game machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the characteristic U2, with a simple configuration using only one of the alternating distribution means, a first control mode in which the launch rate is less than 1, and a second control mode in which the launch rate is 1 are provided. It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the rate of exit is greater than 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging another accessory in the empty game area.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (the door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). It is possible to set the length of the open waiting time) of each control mode to different lengths.

According to the characteristic U3, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball has passed through the passage portion. And the time from the time when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to the time when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open/close door 208b). Waiting time for release) and the total time. Therefore, according to the characteristic U3, in the case where the time from the passage of the game ball through the passage portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variation time of the universal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, a different time (waiting time for opening/closing the door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state is set to a different length. By setting to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b). By changing the, it is possible to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b), and change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion. You can As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the rate of ball launch is less than 1, a second control mode in which the rate of ball launch is 1, and a third control mode in which the rate of ball launch is greater than 1. It will be possible.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic V1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering section.
Entry portion lottery execution means for executing the entry portion lottery based on the game ball entering the entry portion,
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry portion, and the variation display is ended to indicate the result of the entry portion lottery by the entry portion lottery execution means. Entry portion lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information,
Special game state transition means for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the player is provided with a privilege based on the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section being a predetermined result (various jackpots),
Starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability of the result of the entry portion lottery being the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved,
Termination means for terminating the high-probability lottery mode,
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass,
A passing portion lottery executing means for executing a passing portion lottery based on that the game ball has passed through the passing portion,
The identification information corresponding to the result of the passage lottery by the passage portion lottery execution means is started by starting the variation display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion and ending the variation display. A lottery result display means for the passage part (universal figure unit 38) for stopping and displaying
Control means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of a result of the passage portion lottery by the passage portion lottery execution means to cause the ball entrance portion to transit from the first state to the second state; ,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch strength by the launching means is defined as a ball launch rate. In case of
The control means is
It has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A first control mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the rate of ball launch is less than 1;
A second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the rate of exit is 1;
A third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1;
Is feasible,
In the first control mode, the result of the lottery for the entrance portion is the first result (4R normal jackpot A (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) of the predetermined results (various jackpots). And the number of times of the lottery for the ball entrance section executed after the first control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section is the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without terminating after reaching the specified number of times (100 times),
In the second control mode, the result of the lottery for the entrance portion is the second result (8R certainty variation jackpot in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) of the predetermined results (various jackpots). Based on that the result of the ball entry section lottery executed after the second control mode is started is the predetermined result (various jackpots),
In the third control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entrance portion is the third result (4R normal jackpot B (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) of the predetermined results (various jackpots). And the number of times of the lottery for the ball entrance section executed after the third control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section is the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without terminating after reaching the specified number of times (100 times),
The high-probability lottery mode is started based on the result of the lottery for the ball-entering portion being the second result (8R probability variation big hit) among the predetermined results. The drawing ball portion lottery result is ended based on the result of the first result (4R normal jackpot A) or the third result (4R normal jackpot B) of the predetermined results. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the entrance portion is the first result (4R normal jackpot A), the high-probability lottery mode is not started, but the first control mode (first high-frequency support mode) is Be started. When the first control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so that the execution of the entry portion lottery is promoted. However, since the exit rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first control mode ends when the number of times of execution of the lottery for the ball entrance portion reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the ball entrance portion becoming a predetermined result (various big hits). Therefore, the player wants to obtain a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the ball-drawing lottery before the number of executions of the ball-entering lottery reaches the specified number and the first control mode ends. Play the game while expecting. In addition, the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, and thus plays the game while expecting to obtain a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the entry portion lottery as early as possible.

Further, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the ball-on portion becomes the second result (8R probability variation big hit), the high-probability lottery mode is started, and the second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode) is also started. ) Is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball-entering portion lottery will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the second control mode is started, since the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering portion, the execution of the lottery for the ball entering portion is promoted. In the second control mode, the exit rate is 1, so the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Then, the high-probability lottery mode continues at least until the result of the lottery for the ball-entering portion reaches a predetermined result (various jackpots). Further, the second control mode is continued until the result of the lottery for the ball-entering portion reaches a predetermined result (various big hits). Therefore, the player continues the high-probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various big hits) is obtained in the entry part lottery, and the result of the entry part lottery is the second result. (8R probability variation big hit) and play while expecting to continue the high-probability lottery mode. In addition, the player does not increase or decrease the number of game balls he or she has, so that the player can concentrate on the type of the result when the result of the entry part lottery is a predetermined result (various jackpots).

Furthermore, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the ball-on portion becomes the third result (4R normal jackpot B), the high-probability lottery mode is not started, but the third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode). ) Is started. When the third control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so that the execution of the entry portion lottery is promoted. Then, since the rate of exit in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third control mode ends when the number of times the lottery for lottery balls is performed reaches a prescribed number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for lottery balls reaching a predetermined result (various big hits). Therefore, the player ends the third control mode while increasing the number of game balls on hand by continuing the third control mode until just before the number of times of execution of the lottery for the ball entering section reaches the specified number. Play the game with the expectation that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section will be the predetermined result (various jackpots). And, even if the result of the lottery for the entrance portion does not reach the predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of times the lottery for the entrance portion reaches the specified number (100 times), It is possible to obtain the satisfaction that the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases has continued for the longest period.

As described above, according to the feature V1, it is possible to effectively utilize the three control modes to create a new gameplay property in which the player is provided with various expectations, so that the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Characteristic V2]
The gaming machine described in the feature V1,
In the ball entry part lottery result display means, a ball entry part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entry part variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed,
The variation time setting means for the ball entering section,
In the period in which the third control mode is executed,
The gaming machine characterized in that, as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entering portion executed after the third control mode is started increases, a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entering portion.

According to the feature V2, the closer the number of times the lottery for the ball entering portion is performed to the specified number, the longer the variation time for the ball entering portion is set, so the period during which the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player, in which the result of the lottery for the ball-on portion does not reach a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the ball-on portion approaches the prescribed number.

[Characteristic V3]
The gaming machine described in the feature V1 or the feature V2,
In the ball entry part lottery result display means, a ball entry part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entry part variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed,
The lottery execution means for the ball entering section,
Even when it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach generation condition) is satisfied, the condition satisfaction result (removal result (reach result) Occurrence)), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (outcome result (reach non-occurrence)),
The variation time setting means for the ball entering section,
In the period in which the third control mode is executed,
The result of the ball entry section lottery is the condition satisfaction result (loose result (reach occurrence)), the length of the ball entry section variation time corresponding to the ball entry section lottery,
More than the length of the variation time for the ball entering portion corresponding to the lottery for the ball entering portion, the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion is the result of not satisfying the condition (outcome result (reach not occurring)),
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to feature V3, when the result of the lottery for the entrance portion is the condition fulfillment result (out-of-range result (reach occurrence)), the condition non-establishment result (out-of-range result (reach non-occurrence)) Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball entering portion. The larger the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball entry portion, the longer the time required until the number of times the lottery for the ball entry portion is executed reaches the specified number. As a result, the period in which the third control mode continues is extended, and thus the period in which the game balls held by the player increase is also extended. Therefore, as the number of times the result of the lottery for the ball entry part becomes the condition fulfillment result (out-of-range result (reach occurrence)) increases, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be planned.

[Characteristic V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The control means is
Transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display until when the ball entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, the universal unit). By setting the variable time of 38+the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode,
The first control mode (first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment),
The second control mode (second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment),
The third control mode (third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the characteristic V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball-out rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1, and the ball-out rate is 1 Since it is possible to execute a third control mode that exceeds the above, it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even when the time during which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned three control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Characteristic V5]
A gaming machine described in Feature V4,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to two paths,
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The alternate sorting means,
While allocating the one game ball that arrived to the first route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
It is configured to distribute one game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second route to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. Is configured,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching device at a predetermined launch intensity and at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The game machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the feature V5, with a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution unit, a first control mode in which the ball-out rate is less than 1 and a second control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1 It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the rate of exit is greater than 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging another accessory in the empty game area.

[Characteristic V6]
A gaming machine according to feature V4 or feature V5,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (the door 208b in the eleventh embodiment). It is possible to set the length of the open waiting time) of each control mode to different lengths.

According to the feature V6, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball has passed through the passage portion. And the time from the time when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to the time when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open/close door 208b). Waiting time for release) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature V6, in the case where the time from the passage of the game ball through the passage portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (variation time of the universal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, a different time (waiting time for opening/closing the door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state is set to a different length. By setting to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b). By changing the, it is possible to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b), and change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion. You can As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the rate of ball launch is less than 1, a second control mode in which the rate of ball launch is 1, and a third control mode in which the rate of ball launch is greater than 1. It will be possible.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering section.
Entry portion lottery execution means for executing the entry portion lottery based on the game ball entering the entry portion,
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the entry portion, and the variation display is ended to indicate the result of the entry portion lottery by the entry portion lottery execution means. Entry portion lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information,
Special game state transition means for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the player is provided with a privilege based on the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section being a predetermined result (various jackpots),
Starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability of the result of the entry portion lottery being the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved,
Termination means for terminating the high-probability lottery mode,
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass,
A passing portion lottery executing means for executing a passing portion lottery based on that the game ball has passed through the passing portion,
The identification information corresponding to the result of the passage lottery by the passage portion lottery execution means is started by starting the variation display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion and ending the variation display. A lottery result display means for the passage part (universal figure unit 38) for stopping and displaying
Control means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of a result of the passage portion lottery by the passage portion lottery execution means to cause the ball entrance portion to transit from the first state to the second state; ,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch strength by the launching means is defined as a ball launch rate. In case of
The control means is
It has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A game ball non-increasing control mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the exit rate is 1 or less,
A game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the rate of exit is more than 1,
Is feasible,
In the game ball non-increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion is the first result out of the predetermined results (various jackpots) (10R certainty variation jackpot A in the twelfth embodiment, 10R certainty variation jackpot B (FIG. 98). )), and the number of times of the lottery for the ball entering section executed after the game ball non-increasing control mode is started is determined by the result of the lottery for the ball entering section being the predetermined number. It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without getting results (various jackpots),
In the game ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion is the second result (10R certainty variation jackpot C (FIG. 98) in the twelfth embodiment) of the predetermined results (various jackpots). Based on the number of times the lottery for the ball entering portion is performed after the game ball increase control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion is the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without terminating after reaching the specified number of times (100 times),
The high-probability lottery mode is based on the result of the lottery for the entrance portion being the first result (10R probability variation jackpot A, 10R probability variation jackpot B) or the second result (10R probability variation jackpot C). The number of times the lottery for the ball-on-the-ball is performed after the high-probability lottery mode has been started, and the number of times the lottery for the ball-on-the-ball is not the predetermined result (various jackpots). A gaming machine characterized by being terminated when it reaches (100 times).

According to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion becomes the first result (10R certainty variation big hit A or 10R certainty variation big hit B), the high-probability lottery mode is started and the game ball non-increase control mode (first The first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball-entering portion lottery will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering part, so that the execution of the ball entering part lottery is promoted. However, since the exit rate in the game ball non-increase control mode is 1 or less, the game balls held by the player do not increase. Then, in the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball non-increase control mode, the number of times the lottery for the ball-entering portion is executed does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots), and the number of executions of the lottery for the ball-entering portion reaches a prescribed number (100 times) When it reaches, it ends. Therefore, the player achieves a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the entry lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the entry portion lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability lottery mode ends. Play the game while expecting it to be played.

Further, according to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion is the second result (10R probability variation big hit C), the high-probability lottery mode is started and the game ball increase control mode (the third high frequency support) Mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball-entering portion lottery will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. Further, when the game ball increasing control mode is started, the game balls are allowed to enter the ball entering part, so that the execution of the ball entering part lottery is promoted. Further, since the rate of exit in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode, the number of times the lottery for the ball-entering portion is performed reaches a prescribed number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the ball-entering portion becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then it ends. Therefore, while the player keeps the game ball increase control mode until the number of times the lottery for the entrance section reaches the specified number of times and increases the number of game balls that he/she has, the number of times the lottery for the entrance section is specified is defined. Before the high probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are completed after reaching the number of times, the player expects that the result of the lottery for the ball-on-ball section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) and play the game. And, even if the result of the lottery for the entrance portion does not reach the predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of times the lottery for the entrance portion reaches the specified number (100 times), It is possible to obtain the satisfaction that the game ball increase control mode in which the game balls increase is continued for the longest period.

As described above, according to the feature W1, it is possible to create a new game property in which the player is provided with various feelings of expectation during the period in which the high-probability lottery mode with a limited number of times is being executed. The interest can be improved.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine described in the feature W1,
In the ball entry part lottery result display means, a ball entry part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entry part variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed,
The variation time setting means for the ball entering section,
In the period when the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entrance portion as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entrance portion executed after the game ball increase control mode is started increases.

According to the feature W2, the closer the number of times the lottery for the ball entering portion is performed to the specified number, the longer the variation time for the ball entering portion is set, so that the duration of the game ball increasing control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frustration of the player, in which the result of the lottery for the ball-on portion does not reach a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the ball-on portion approaches the prescribed number.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine described in the feature W1 or the feature W2,
In the ball entry part lottery result display means, a ball entry part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entry part variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed,
The lottery execution means for the ball entering section,
Even when it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach generation condition) is satisfied, the condition satisfaction result (removal result (reach result) Occurrence)), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (outcome result (reach non-occurrence)),
The variation time setting means for the ball entering section,
In the period when the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
The result of the ball entry section lottery is the condition satisfaction result (loose result (reach occurrence)), the length of the ball entry section variation time corresponding to the ball entry section lottery,
More than the length of the variation time for the ball entering portion corresponding to the lottery for the ball entering portion, the result of the lottery for the ball entering portion becomes the result of not satisfying the condition (outcome result (reach non-occurrence)),
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for the entrance portion is the condition fulfillment result (out-of-range result (reach occurrence)), the condition is not satisfied (out-of-range result (reach non-occurrence)). Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball entering portion. The larger the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball entry portion, the longer the time required until the number of times the lottery for the ball entry portion is executed reaches the specified number. As a result, the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues continues for a long time, so that the period during which the game balls held by the player increase increases. Therefore, as the number of times the result of the lottery for the ball entry part becomes the condition fulfillment result (out-of-range result (reach occurrence)) increases, it is possible to create a new game property in which the number of game balls increases, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be planned.

[Feature W4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The control means is
Transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display until when the ball entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, the universal unit). By setting the variable time of 38+the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to a different length for each control mode,
With the game ball non-increase control mode (first high frequency support mode, second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment),
With the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to execute the game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball exit rate is 1 or less and the game ball increase control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1. As a result, intonation can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature W4, for example, even when the time during which the ball entrance portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, the above-mentioned two control modes can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
A gaming machine according to feature W4,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to two paths,
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the allocated game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The alternate sorting means,
While allocating the one game ball that arrived to the first route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
It is configured to distribute one game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second route to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. Is configured,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously launched by the launching device at a predetermined launch intensity and at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The game machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

According to the feature W5, with a simple configuration using only one of the alternating distribution means, a game ball non-increasing control mode in which the ball launch rate is 1 or less, and a game ball increasing control mode in which the ball launch rate exceeds 1. Can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area such as arranging another accessory in the empty game area.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to feature W4 or feature W5,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (the door 208b in the twelfth embodiment). It is possible to set the length of the open waiting time) of each control mode to different lengths.

According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball passes through the passage portion. And the time from the time when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to the time when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open/close door 208b). Waiting time for release) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature W5, when the time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38) from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means is set to the same length. Even if there is, a different time (waiting time for opening/closing the door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the entrance portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state is set to a different length. By setting to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entry portion starts the transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b). By changing the, it is possible to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38 + waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b), and change the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion. You can As a result, it is possible to realize the game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball exit rate is 1 or less, and the game ball increase control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
The control means is
As a game ball non-increasing mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball-out rate is 1 or less,
A game ball reduction control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball-out rate is less than 1,
A game ball maintenance control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the exit rate is 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing.

According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part is promoted, and thus the execution of the ball entry part lottery is promoted. However, since the exit rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, the game balls held by the player decrease. Therefore, the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, and therefore plays the game while expecting a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the entry lottery as early as possible. As described above, according to the feature W7, since various expectations can be given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game ball.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter.
The state of the ball entering portion is a first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entering portion, and the state of the game ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. A state transition means (an opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is the state,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering section.
An acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering unit,
Entry section lottery execution means for executing the entry section lottery based on the acquired special information,
While starting the variable display of the identification information based on the execution of the ball entry lottery, the identification information corresponding to the result of the ball entry lottery by the ball entry lottery execution means after ending the variable display Entry result lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying,
A variation time setting means for a ball entering portion, which sets a length of a variation time for a ball entering portion (a variation time of the special figure unit 37) which is a time for which the identification information is variably displayed on the ball entering portion lottery result display means,
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass,
A passing portion lottery executing means for executing a passing portion lottery based on that the game ball has passed through the passing portion,
The identification information corresponding to the result of the passage lottery by the passage portion lottery execution means is started by starting the variation display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion and ending the variation display. A lottery result display means for the passage part (universal figure unit 38) for stopping and displaying
After setting the length of the transit time variation time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38), which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed on the transit time lottery result display means, and after the transit time variation time has elapsed Controlling means for controlling the state transition means on the basis of a result of the passing portion lottery performed by the passing portion lottery execution means to transition the ball entering portion from the first state to the second state When,
A variation time table for the ball entry portion in which the length of the variation time for the ball entry portion is stored in correspondence with the number of times the lottery for the ball entry portion is performed (table A for special figure unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)). ) And a passage section variation time table in which the length of the passage section variation time is stored corresponding to the number of times of execution of the ball entry section lottery (the universal figure unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)). )) and a table group (a variable time table set A (FIG. 102) for high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) as a set of table groups,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch strength by the launching means is defined as a ball launch rate. In case of
The control means is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
By setting the length of the passage time variation time to a different length for each of the control modes,
A first control mode (mode shown in FIG. 99 of the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the rate of exit is less than 1;
A second control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 100 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball-out rate is 1;
A third control mode (a mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1,
At least two control aspects of
When the variation time setting means for the ball entry portion sets the length of the variation time for the ball entry portion with reference to the variation time table for the ball entry portion,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the length of the passage variation time is set with reference to the passage variation time table and the passage variation time table stored as a set of tables.

According to the feature X1, by setting the length of the transit portion variation time (variation time of the universal figure unit 38) to a different length for each control mode, the first control in which the exit rate is less than 1 It is possible to execute at least two control modes of the mode, the second control mode in which the ball exit rate is 1, and the third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1, so that the game The interest can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the feature X1, the length of the passing portion variation time and the length of the entry portion variation time are set based on the number of times the entry portion lottery (game time) is executed. Then, the exit rate changes depending on the length of the set passage time variation time. That is, the entering rate of the game ball into the entering section changes. Therefore, if the variation time table for the entry portion suitable for the rate of entry of the game balls into the entry portion is stored in advance in the entry portion variation time table, the entry portion lottery (game time) It is possible to set a variation time for entry suitable for the entry rate of the game ball into the entry part, which changes based on the number of executions of.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine described in the feature X1,
A holding storage means for holding and storing the special information acquired from the start of the variable display of the identification information by the entry portion lottery result display means to the end of the stop display with a prescribed number as an upper limit,
In the variation time table for the ball entering portion (table A for special figure unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)), when the length of the variation time for the passing portion is set, the ball enters the ball entering portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a variation time that is longer than an interval between game balls to be played is stored.

According to the feature X2, since the special information can be always stored in the holding storage means, it is possible to realize a state in which the ball-drawing-part lottery is continuously executed without interruption.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups (variable time table sets A and B (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment),
The gaming machine, wherein the control means switches the table group to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the small hit is won).

According to the feature X3, since the table group to be referred to is switched, it is possible to change the variation time for the ball entry portion, the variation time for the passage portion, and the ball exit rate, which are set based on the number of times the lottery for the ball entry portion is executed. .. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately allocating the reached game balls to two paths,
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the allocated game balls can pass through the passing portion,
A second route (route R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the sorted game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
Equipped with
The alternate sorting means,
While allocating the one game ball that arrived to the first route,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
It is configured to distribute one game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second route to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering part when the ball entering part is in the second state. Is configured,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired by the firing means at a predetermined firing intensity and at a predetermined interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion per a predetermined time is the variation time for the passing portion. A game machine characterized by different lengths.

According to the feature X4, with a simple configuration using only one of the alternating distribution means, a first control mode in which the ball launch rate is less than 1, and a second control mode in which the ball launch rate is 1. It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging another accessory in the empty game area.

The inventions of the characteristic group A to the characteristic group X solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure and performance in order to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launching operation, and a start ball which is provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter Section, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section,
A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition information storage unit that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition unit when a game ball enters the starting ball entering unit.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped pattern.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each mode described in the column of the outline of the invention are to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. If the technical features are not described as essential in the present specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. .. window 19... glass unit 20... upper plate 21... lower plate 22... discharge port 23... lever 24... production operation button 25... operation handle 30... Game board 31... Guide rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32... General winning opening 33... First starting opening 34... Second starting opening 34a... Electric Characters 34b... Electric character driving part 35... Through gate 36... Variable winning a prize device 36a... Large winning opening 36b... Opening/closing door 36c... Variable winning award driving part 37... Special Figure unit 37a...First result display section 37b...Second result display section 37c...First hold display section 37d...Second hold display section 38...Universal figure unit 39...Round Display unit 40... Variable display unit 41... Design display device 41a... Display surface 41aL... Display area 41aS... Display area 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main Display 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56. .. Case rail 60... Main control unit 61... Main control board 62... Main side MPU
63...Main ROM
63a... hit/fail table storage area 63b... distribution table storage area 63c... reach determination table storage area 63d... display duration table storage area 63e... stop result table storage area 63f... Command information storage area 64...Main RAM
64a...lottery counter buffer 64b...holding ball storage area 64b...holding information storage area 64c...electrical hand holding area 64d...various counter areas 64e...various flag storage areas 67a.. .Various detection sensors 70...Payout control device 71...Payout device 80...Launch control device 81...Game ball launch mechanism 85...Power supply device 86...Power failure monitoring circuit 90...Voice Light emission control device 91...Voice light emission control board 92...Sound side MPU
93... Sound side ROM
93a...Hold confirmation confirmation table storage area 93b...Presence notice advance notice table storage area 93c...Presence notice notice production table storage area 93d...Presence notice stop symbol table storage area 93e... Variable display pattern table storage area 94... Sound side RAM
94a...Various flag storage areas 94b...Various counter areas 94c...Lottery counter area 94d...Preliminary visual effect notice storage area 100...Display control device 101...Display control board 102... Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104... Work RAM
105...VDP
106... Character ROM
107... Video RAM
200... 2nd starting opening unit 202... Opening part 204... Alternate distribution mechanism 204a... Central piece 204b... Left side part 204c... Right side part 204d... Rotating shaft 204e... Left side holding part 204f... Right side holding part 206... Thru gate 208... Opening/closing ball entrance device 208a... Second starting opening 208b... Opening/closing door 208c... Taxiway 300. .. 2nd starting opening unit 300B... 2nd starting opening unit 300C... 2nd starting opening unit 300D... 2nd starting opening unit 300E... 2nd starting opening unit 300F... 2nd starting Mouth unit 302...Aperture 304...Alternative distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism)
304a... Central piece 304b... Left piece 304c... Right piece 304d... Rotating shaft 304e... Left holding part 304f... Right holding part 305... Second alternate distribution Mechanism 305A... Third alternating distribution mechanism 305a... Central piece 305b... Left side piece 305c... Right side piece 305d... Rotating shaft 305e... Left side holding section 305f... Right side Holding unit 306...Through gate 308...Opening/closing ball entrance device 308a...Second starting opening 308b...Opening/closing door 308c...Tax

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball circulating in the game area,
Passing means through which the game balls circulating in the game area can pass,
A state before filling ball unit, the first state is input sphere impossible or difficult state of the game balls into the ball entrance means, capable or easily enter the sphere of game balls into the ball entrance means State transition means for transitioning between the second state, which is a state,
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage means ,
A distribution means for distributing the arrived game balls to a plurality of routes,
A first path configured such that the allocated game balls can pass through the passing means,
A second path configured such that the allocated game balls cannot pass through the passing means,
Equipped with
The distribution means,
It is possible to distribute the reached game ball to the first route,
It is possible to distribute a game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first route to the second path,
It is configured such that a game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second route can be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the allocated game balls can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering means is in the second state. Is configured,
The control means is
A plurality of types of transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing means to when the ball entering means starts the transition from the first state to the second state, gaming machine, wherein the the Ru can der be set to the length.